]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blob - ld/ld.texi
Add support for the C_SKY series of processors.
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set CSKY
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set S/390
38 @set SPU
39 @set TICOFF
40 @set WIN32
41 @set XTENSA
42 @end ifset
43 @c man end
44
45 @ifnottex
46 @dircategory Software development
47 @direntry
48 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
49 @end direntry
50 @end ifnottex
51
52 @copying
53 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56 @end ifset
57 version @value{VERSION}.
58
59 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
60
61 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
62 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
63 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
66 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
67 @end copying
68 @iftex
69 @finalout
70 @setchapternewpage odd
71 @settitle The GNU linker
72 @titlepage
73 @title The GNU linker
74 @sp 1
75 @subtitle @code{ld}
76 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78 @end ifset
79 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80 @author Steve Chamberlain
81 @author Ian Lance Taylor
82 @page
83
84 @tex
85 {\parskip=0pt
86 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
88 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
89 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90 }
91 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92 @end tex
93
94 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
95 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
96 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset ARM
139 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset M68HC11
142 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset HPPA
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68K
148 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset MIPS
151 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset POWERPC
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC64
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset S/390
160 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset SPU
163 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset TICOFF
166 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset WIN32
169 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170 @end ifset
171 @ifset XTENSA
172 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173 @end ifset
174 @end ifclear
175 @ifclear SingleFormat
176 * BFD:: BFD
177 @end ifclear
178 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
182 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
183 * LD Index:: LD Index
184 @end menu
185 @end ifnottex
186
187 @node Overview
188 @chapter Overview
189
190 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191 @cindex what is this?
192
193 @ifset man
194 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
195 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
196 @c man end
197
198 @c man begin SEEALSO
199 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201 @file{ld}.
202 @c man end
203 @end ifset
204
205 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
207 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
208 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
209 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
210
211 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
212 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
215 @ifset man
216 @c For the man only
217 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
218 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
220 @end ifset
221
222 @ifclear SingleFormat
223 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
225 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228 @end ifclear
229
230 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
233 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
234 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
236 @c man end
237
238 @node Invocation
239 @chapter Invocation
240
241 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
243 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
244 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245 you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
247 @c man end
248
249 @ifset UsesEnvVars
250 @menu
251 * Options:: Command-line Options
252 * Environment:: Environment Variables
253 @end menu
254
255 @node Options
256 @section Command-line Options
257 @end ifset
258
259 @cindex command line
260 @cindex options
261
262 @c man begin OPTIONS
263
264 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266 @cindex standard Unix system
267 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
268 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269 link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271 @smallexample
272 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273 @end smallexample
274
275 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
276 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
280 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
281 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
286 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288 noted in the descriptions below.
289
290 @cindex object files
291 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294 an option and its argument.
295
296 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300 message @samp{No input files}.
301
302 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
303 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
308 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
313
314 For options whose names are a single letter,
315 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317 option that requires them.
318
319 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
320 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
321 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
322 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
323 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
324 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326 output.
327
328 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333 accepted.
334
335 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
336 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
337 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338 compiler driver) like this:
339
340 @smallexample
341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
342 @end smallexample
343
344 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
345 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352 @smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354 @end smallexample
355
356 Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
357 linker:
358
359 @table @gcctabopt
360 @include at-file.texi
361
362 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
363 @item -a @var{keyword}
364 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
370 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
377 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
378 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
379 interface.
380
381 @ifclear SingleFormat
382 @cindex binary input format
383 @kindex -b @var{format}
384 @kindex --format=@var{format}
385 @cindex input format
386 @cindex input format
387 @item -b @var{input-format}
388 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
389 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
391 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
392 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
393 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
394 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
395 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399 @xref{BFD}.
400
401 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403 linking object files of different formats), by including
404 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
405 particular format.
406
407 The default format is taken from the environment variable
408 @code{GNUTARGET}.
409 @ifset UsesEnvVars
410 @xref{Environment}.
411 @end ifset
412 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
413 @code{TARGET};
414 @ifclear man
415 see @ref{Format Commands}.
416 @end ifclear
417 @end ifclear
418
419 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421 @cindex compatibility, MRI
422 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
424 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
425 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
426 @ifclear man
427 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428 @end ifclear
429 @ifset man
430 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431 @end ifset
432 Introduce MRI script files with
433 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
434 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
436 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438 @cindex common allocation
439 @kindex -d
440 @kindex -dc
441 @kindex -dp
442 @item -d
443 @itemx -dc
444 @itemx -dp
445 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
451 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
460 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
461
462 @cindex entry point, from command line
463 @kindex -e @var{entry}
464 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
465 @item -e @var{entry}
466 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
475 @kindex --exclude-libs
476 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
478 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
479 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484 be treated as hidden.
485
486 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497 regardless of this option.
498
499 @cindex dynamic symbol table
500 @kindex -E
501 @kindex --export-dynamic
502 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
503 @item -E
504 @itemx --export-dynamic
505 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
506 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
515
516 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519 linking the program itself.
520
521 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
522 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
523 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
524
525 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
529 @ifclear SingleFormat
530 @cindex big-endian objects
531 @cindex endianness
532 @kindex -EB
533 @item -EB
534 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536 @cindex little-endian objects
537 @kindex -EL
538 @item -EL
539 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
540 @end ifclear
541
542 @kindex -f @var{name}
543 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544 @item -f @var{name}
545 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
546 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
559 machine specific performance.
560
561 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
564 @kindex -F @var{name}
565 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
566 @item -F @var{name}
567 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
568 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579 @var{name}.
580
581 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
582 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
583 object files.
584 @ifclear SingleFormat
585 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
586 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
587 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
588 environment variable.
589 @end ifclear
590 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591 creating an ELF shared object.
592
593 @cindex finalization function
594 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
595 @item -fini=@var{name}
596 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599 the function to call.
600
601 @kindex -g
602 @item -g
603 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
605 @kindex -G @var{value}
606 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
607 @cindex object size
608 @item -G @var{value}
609 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
612 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
613 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615 @cindex runtime library name
616 @kindex -h @var{name}
617 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
618 @item -h @var{name}
619 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
620 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626 @kindex -i
627 @cindex incremental link
628 @item -i
629 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
631 @cindex initialization function
632 @kindex -init=@var{name}
633 @item -init=@var{name}
634 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637 function to call.
638
639 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
640 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
641 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
642 @item -l @var{namespec}
643 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
647 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
648 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
649
650 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
651 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657 @var{filename}.
658
659 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
666 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
667 archives multiple times.
668
669 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671 @ifset GENERIC
672 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
673 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
674 behaviour of the AIX linker.
675 @end ifset
676
677 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
678 @kindex -L @var{dir}
679 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
680 @item -L @var{searchdir}
681 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
682 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
684 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
687 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
688 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690 option is specified.
691
692 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
695
696 @ifset UsesEnvVars
697 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
698 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
699 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700 @end ifset
701
702 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706 @cindex emulation
707 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
708 @item -m @var{emulation}
709 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716 configured.
717
718 @cindex link map
719 @kindex -M
720 @kindex --print-map
721 @item -M
722 @itemx --print-map
723 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724 information about the link, including the following:
725
726 @itemize @bullet
727 @item
728 Where object files are mapped into memory.
729 @item
730 How common symbols are allocated.
731 @item
732 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
734 @item
735 The values assigned to symbols.
736
737 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743 linker script containing:
744
745 @smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749 @end smallexample
750
751 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752 option is used:
753
754 @smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758 @end smallexample
759
760 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761 scripts.
762 @end itemize
763
764 @kindex -n
765 @cindex read-only text
766 @cindex NMAGIC
767 @kindex --nmagic
768 @item -n
769 @itemx --nmagic
770 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
771 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
772 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
773
774 @kindex -N
775 @kindex --omagic
776 @cindex read/write from cmd line
777 @cindex OMAGIC
778 @item -N
779 @itemx --omagic
780 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
781 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
782 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
783 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
784 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
785 specification published by Microsoft.
786
787 @kindex --no-omagic
788 @cindex OMAGIC
789 @item --no-omagic
790 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
791 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
792 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
793 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
794
795 @kindex -o @var{output}
796 @kindex --output=@var{output}
797 @cindex naming the output file
798 @item -o @var{output}
799 @itemx --output=@var{output}
800 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
801 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
802 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
803
804 @kindex -O @var{level}
805 @cindex generating optimized output
806 @item -O @var{level}
807 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
808 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
809 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
810 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
811 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
812 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
813 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
814
815 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
816 @item -plugin @var{name}
817 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
818 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
819 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
820 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
821 wish.
822
823 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
824 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
825 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
826 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
827 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
828 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
829 just copy in the newest one.
830
831 @kindex --push-state
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
833 @item --push-state
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
849
850 @smallexample
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852 @end smallexample
853
854 @kindex --pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
856 @item --pop-state
857 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
858 flags governing input file handling.
859
860 @kindex -q
861 @kindex --emit-relocs
862 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
863 @item -q
864 @itemx --emit-relocs
865 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
866 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
867 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
868 in larger executables.
869
870 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
871
872 @kindex --force-dynamic
873 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
874 @item --force-dynamic
875 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
876 to VxWorks targets.
877
878 @cindex partial link
879 @cindex relocatable output
880 @kindex -r
881 @kindex --relocatable
882 @item -r
883 @itemx --relocatable
884 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
885 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
886 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
887 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
888 @code{OMAGIC}.
889 @c ; see @option{-N}.
890 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
891 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
892 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
893
894 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
895 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
896 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
897 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
898 with input files in other formats at all.
899
900 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
901
902 @kindex -R @var{file}
903 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
904 @cindex symbol-only input
905 @item -R @var{filename}
906 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
907 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
908 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
909 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
910 programs. You may use this option more than once.
911
912 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
913 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
914 the @option{-rpath} option.
915
916 @kindex -s
917 @kindex --strip-all
918 @cindex strip all symbols
919 @item -s
920 @itemx --strip-all
921 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
922
923 @kindex -S
924 @kindex --strip-debug
925 @cindex strip debugger symbols
926 @item -S
927 @itemx --strip-debug
928 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
929
930 @kindex --strip-discarded
931 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
932 @item --strip-discarded
933 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
934 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
935 Enabled by default.
936
937 @kindex -t
938 @kindex --trace
939 @cindex input files, displaying
940 @item -t
941 @itemx --trace
942 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
943
944 @kindex -T @var{script}
945 @kindex --script=@var{script}
946 @cindex script files
947 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
948 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
949 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
950 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
951 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
952 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
953 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
954 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
955 options accumulate.
956
957 @kindex -dT @var{script}
958 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
959 @cindex script files
960 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
961 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
962 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
963
964 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
965 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
966 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
967 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
968 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
969 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
970 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
971 @samp{gcc}).
972
973 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
974 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
975 @cindex undefined symbol
976 @item -u @var{symbol}
977 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
978 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
979 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
980 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
981 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
982 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
983
984 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
985 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
986 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
987 instead.
988
989 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
990 @cindex symbols, require defined
991 @cindex defined symbol
992 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
993 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
994 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
995 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
996 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
997 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
998 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
999
1000 @kindex -Ur
1001 @cindex constructors
1002 @item -Ur
1003 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1004 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1005 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1006 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1007 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1008 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1009 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1010 @samp{-r} for the others.
1011
1012 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1013 @cindex orphan sections
1014 @cindex sections, orphan
1015 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1016 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1017 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1018
1019 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1020
1021 @table @code
1022 @item place
1023 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1024 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1025 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1026
1027 @item discard
1028 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1029 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1030
1031 @item warn
1032 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1033 issue a warning.
1034
1035 @item error
1036 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1037 @end table
1038
1039 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1040
1041 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1042 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1043 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1044 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1045 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1046 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1047 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1048 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1049 in a linker script.
1050
1051 @kindex -v
1052 @kindex -V
1053 @kindex --version
1054 @cindex version
1055 @item -v
1056 @itemx --version
1057 @itemx -V
1058 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1059 lists the supported emulations.
1060
1061 @kindex -x
1062 @kindex --discard-all
1063 @cindex deleting local symbols
1064 @item -x
1065 @itemx --discard-all
1066 Delete all local symbols.
1067
1068 @kindex -X
1069 @kindex --discard-locals
1070 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1071 @item -X
1072 @itemx --discard-locals
1073 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1074 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1075 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1076
1077 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1078 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1079 @cindex symbol tracing
1080 @item -y @var{symbol}
1081 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1082 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1083 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1084 to prepend an underscore.
1085
1086 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1087 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1088
1089 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1090 @item -Y @var{path}
1091 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1092 for Solaris compatibility.
1093
1094 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1095 @item -z @var{keyword}
1096 The recognized keywords are:
1097 @table @samp
1098
1099 @item bndplt
1100 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1101
1102 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1103 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1104 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1105 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1106 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1107 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1108 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1109 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1110 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1111 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1112 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1113
1114 @item combreloc
1115 @itemx nocombreloc
1116 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1117 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1118
1119 @item common
1120 @itemx nocommon
1121 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1122 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1123
1124 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1125 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1126 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1127 using pages of this size.
1128
1129 @item defs
1130 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1131 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1132 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1133
1134 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1135 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1136 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1137 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1138 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1139 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1140 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1141 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1142 these options.
1143
1144 @item execstack
1145 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1146
1147 @item global
1148 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1149 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1150 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1151
1152 @item globalaudit
1153 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1154 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1155 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1156 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1157 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
1158 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1159
1160 @item ibtplt
1161 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1162 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1163
1164 @item ibt
1165 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1166 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1167 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1168
1169 @item initfirst
1170 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1171 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1172 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1173 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1174 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1175 objects.
1176
1177 @item interpose
1178 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1179 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1180 libraries not so marked.
1181
1182 @item lazy
1183 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1184 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1185 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1186 Lazy binding is the default.
1187
1188 @item loadfltr
1189 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1190
1191 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1192 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1193
1194 @item muldefs
1195 Allow multiple definitions.
1196
1197 @item nocopyreloc
1198 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1199 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1200
1201 @item nodefaultlib
1202 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1203 should ignore any default library search paths.
1204
1205 @item nodelete
1206 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1207
1208 @item nodlopen
1209 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1210
1211 @item nodump
1212 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1213
1214 @item noexecstack
1215 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1216
1217 @item noextern-protected-data
1218 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1219 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1220 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1221 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1222 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1223 i386 and x86-64.
1224
1225 @item noreloc-overflow
1226 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1227 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1228 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1229
1230 @item now
1231 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1232 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1233 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1234 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1235 called.
1236
1237 @item origin
1238 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1239
1240 @item relro
1241 @itemx norelro
1242 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1243 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1244 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1245 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1246 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1247
1248 @item separate-code
1249 @itemx noseparate-code
1250 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1251 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1252 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1253 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1254
1255 @item shstk
1256 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1257 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1258 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1259
1260 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1261 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1262 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1263 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1264
1265 @item text
1266 @itemx notext
1267 @itemx textoff
1268 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1269 relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1270 @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1271
1272 @item undefs
1273 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1274 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1275 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1276
1277 @end table
1278
1279 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1280
1281 @kindex -(
1282 @cindex groups of archives
1283 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1284 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1285 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1286 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1287
1288 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1289 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1290 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1291 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1292 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1293 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1294 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1295 resolved.
1296
1297 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1298 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1299 more archives.
1300
1301 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1302 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1303 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1304 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1305 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1306 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1307 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1308 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1309 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1310 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1311 restore the old behaviour.
1312
1313 @kindex --as-needed
1314 @kindex --no-as-needed
1315 @item --as-needed
1316 @itemx --no-as-needed
1317 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1318 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1319 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1320 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1321 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1322 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1323 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1324 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1325 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1326 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1327 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1328 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1329 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1330
1331 @kindex --add-needed
1332 @kindex --no-add-needed
1333 @item --add-needed
1334 @itemx --no-add-needed
1335 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1336 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1337 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1338 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1339
1340 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1341 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1342 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1343
1344 @kindex -Bdynamic
1345 @kindex -dy
1346 @kindex -call_shared
1347 @item -Bdynamic
1348 @itemx -dy
1349 @itemx -call_shared
1350 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1351 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1352 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1353 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1354 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1355 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1356
1357 @kindex -Bgroup
1358 @item -Bgroup
1359 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1360 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1361 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1362 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1363 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1364
1365 @kindex -Bstatic
1366 @kindex -dn
1367 @kindex -non_shared
1368 @kindex -static
1369 @item -Bstatic
1370 @itemx -dn
1371 @itemx -non_shared
1372 @itemx -static
1373 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1374 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1375 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1376 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1377 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1378 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1379 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1380 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1381 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1382 libraries.
1383
1384 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1385 @item -Bsymbolic
1386 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1387 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1388 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1389 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1390 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1391 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1392 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1393 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1394
1395 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1396 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1397 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1398 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1399 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1400 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1401 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1402 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1403 libraries and position independent executables.
1404
1405 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1406 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1407 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1408 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1409 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1410 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1411 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1412 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1413 which support shared libraries.
1414
1415 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1416 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1417
1418 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1419 @item --dynamic-list-data
1420 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1421
1422 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1423 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1424 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1425 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1426
1427 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1428 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1429 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1430
1431 @kindex --check-sections
1432 @kindex --no-check-sections
1433 @item --check-sections
1434 @itemx --no-check-sections
1435 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1436 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1437 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1438 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1439 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1440 restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1441 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1442 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1443 option.
1444
1445 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1446 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1447 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1448 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1449 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1450 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1451 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1452 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1453 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1454 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1455 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1456 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1457
1458 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1459 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1460 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1461 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1462 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1463 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1464 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1465 symbols.
1466
1467 @cindex cross reference table
1468 @kindex --cref
1469 @item --cref
1470 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1471 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1472 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1473
1474 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1475 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1476 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1477 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1478 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1479 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1480 symbol are listed.
1481
1482 @cindex common allocation
1483 @kindex --no-define-common
1484 @item --no-define-common
1485 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1486 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1487 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1488
1489 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1490 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1491 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1492 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1493 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1494 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1495 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1496 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1497 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1498 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1499
1500 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1501 @cindex section groups
1502 @cindex COMDAT
1503 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1504 @item --force-group-allocation
1505 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1506 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1507 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1508 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1509 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1510 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1511
1512 @cindex symbols, from command line
1513 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1514 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1515 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1516 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1517 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1518 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1519 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1520 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1521 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1522 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1523 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1524 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1525
1526 @cindex demangling, from command line
1527 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1528 @kindex --no-demangle
1529 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1530 @itemx --no-demangle
1531 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1532 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1533 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1534 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1535 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1536 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1537 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1538 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1539 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1540
1541 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1542 @kindex -I@var{file}
1543 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1544 @item -I@var{file}
1545 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1546 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1547 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1548 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1549 doing.
1550
1551 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1552 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1553 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1554 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1555 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1556 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1557
1558 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1559 @item --embedded-relocs
1560 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1561 that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1562 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1563 targets.
1564
1565 @kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1566 @item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1567 Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1568 in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1569
1570 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1571 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1572 @item --fatal-warnings
1573 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1574 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1575 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1576
1577 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1578 @item --force-exe-suffix
1579 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1580
1581 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1582 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1583 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1584 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1585 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1586 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1587
1588 @kindex --gc-sections
1589 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1590 @cindex garbage collection
1591 @item --gc-sections
1592 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1593 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1594 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1595 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1596 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1597 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1598 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1599
1600 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1601 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1602 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1603 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1604 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1605 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1606 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1607 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1608 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1609
1610 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1611 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1612 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1613 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1614
1615 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1616 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1617 @cindex garbage collection
1618 @item --print-gc-sections
1619 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1620 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1621 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1622 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1623 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1624 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1625 line.
1626
1627 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1628 @cindex garbage collection
1629 @item --gc-keep-exported
1630 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1631 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1632 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1633 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1634 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1635 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1636 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1637 ELF format targets.
1638
1639 @kindex --print-output-format
1640 @cindex output format
1641 @item --print-output-format
1642 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1643 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1644 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1645
1646 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1647 @cindex memory usage
1648 @item --print-memory-usage
1649 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1650 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1651 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1652 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1653 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1654
1655 @smallexample
1656 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1657 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1658 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1659 @end smallexample
1660
1661 @cindex help
1662 @cindex usage
1663 @kindex --help
1664 @item --help
1665 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1666
1667 @kindex --target-help
1668 @item --target-help
1669 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1670
1671 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1672 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1673 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1674 @option{-M} option, above.
1675
1676 @cindex memory usage
1677 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1678 @item --no-keep-memory
1679 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1680 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1681 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1682 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1683 while linking a large executable.
1684
1685 @kindex --no-undefined
1686 @kindex -z defs
1687 @kindex -z undefs
1688 @item --no-undefined
1689 @itemx -z defs
1690 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1691 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1692 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1693 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1694 libraries being linked in.
1695
1696 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1697
1698 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1699 @kindex -z muldefs
1700 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1701 @itemx -z muldefs
1702 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1703 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1704 first definition will be used.
1705
1706 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1707 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1708 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1709 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1710 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1711 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1712 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1713 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1714 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1715
1716 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1717 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1718 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1719 a shared library.
1720
1721 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1722 libraries specified at link time are that:
1723
1724 @itemize @bullet
1725 @item
1726 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1727 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1728 resolvable at load time.
1729 @item
1730 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1731 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1732
1733 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1734 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1735 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1736 appropriate memset function.
1737 @end itemize
1738
1739 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1740 @item --no-undefined-version
1741 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1742 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1743 will be issued instead.
1744
1745 @kindex --default-symver
1746 @item --default-symver
1747 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1748 exported symbols.
1749
1750 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1751 @item --default-imported-symver
1752 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1753 imported symbols.
1754
1755 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1756 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1757 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1758 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1759 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1760 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1761 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1762 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1763 inappropriate.
1764
1765 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1766 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1767 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1768 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1769
1770 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1771 @item --no-whole-archive
1772 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1773 archive files.
1774
1775 @cindex output file after errors
1776 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1777 @item --noinhibit-exec
1778 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1779 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1780 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1781 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1782
1783 @kindex -nostdlib
1784 @item -nostdlib
1785 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1786 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1787 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1788
1789 @ifclear SingleFormat
1790 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1791 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1792 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1793 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1794 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1795 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1796 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1797 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1798 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1799 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1800 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1801 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1802 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1803 @end ifclear
1804
1805 @kindex --out-implib
1806 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1807 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1808 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1809 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1810 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1811 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1812 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1813 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1814
1815 @kindex -pie
1816 @kindex --pic-executable
1817 @item -pie
1818 @itemx --pic-executable
1819 @cindex position independent executables
1820 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1821 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1822 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1823 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1824 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1825 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1826
1827 @kindex -qmagic
1828 @item -qmagic
1829 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1830
1831 @kindex -Qy
1832 @item -Qy
1833 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1834
1835 @kindex --relax
1836 @cindex synthesizing linker
1837 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1838 @cindex --no-relax
1839 @item --relax
1840 @itemx --no-relax
1841 An option with machine dependent effects.
1842 @ifset GENERIC
1843 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1844 @end ifset
1845 @ifset H8300
1846 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1847 @end ifset
1848 @ifset XTENSA
1849 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1850 @end ifset
1851 @ifset M68HC11
1852 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1853 @end ifset
1854 @ifset NIOSII
1855 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1856 @end ifset
1857 @ifset POWERPC
1858 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1859 @end ifset
1860
1861 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1862 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1863 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1864 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1865 instructions, and combining constant values.
1866
1867 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1868 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1869 @ifset GENERIC
1870 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1871 family of processors.
1872 @end ifset
1873
1874 @ifset GENERIC
1875 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1876 but ignored.
1877 @end ifset
1878
1879 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1880 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1881
1882 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1883 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1884 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1885 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1886 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1887 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1888 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1889 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1890 @ifset GENERIC
1891 (such as VxWorks)
1892 @end ifset
1893 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1894 run-time memory.
1895
1896 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1897 or symbols needed for relocations.
1898
1899 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1900 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1901
1902 @ifset GENERIC
1903 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1904 @cindex runtime library search path
1905 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1906 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1907 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1908 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1909 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1910 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1911 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1912 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1913 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1914 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1915
1916 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1917 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1918 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1919 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1920 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1921 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1922 file systems.
1923
1924 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1925 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1926 the @option{-rpath} option.
1927 @end ifset
1928
1929 @ifset GENERIC
1930 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1931 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1932 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1933 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1934 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1935 of the input files.
1936
1937 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1938 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1939 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1940 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1941 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1942 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1943 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1944 appearing multiple times.
1945
1946 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1947 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1948 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1949 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
1950 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1951
1952 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1953 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1954 supported.
1955
1956 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1957 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1958 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1959 runtime linker would do.
1960
1961 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1962 libraries:
1963 @enumerate
1964 @item
1965 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1966 @item
1967 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1968 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1969 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1970 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1971 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1972 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1973 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1974 @item
1975 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1976 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1977 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1978 @item
1979 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1980 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1981 @item
1982 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1983 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1984 @item
1985 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1986 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1987 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1988 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1989 @item
1990 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1991 @item
1992 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1993 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1994 @end enumerate
1995
1996 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1997 warning and continue with the link.
1998 @end ifset
1999
2000 @kindex -shared
2001 @kindex -Bshareable
2002 @item -shared
2003 @itemx -Bshareable
2004 @cindex shared libraries
2005 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2006 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2007 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2008 undefined symbols in the link.
2009
2010 @kindex --sort-common
2011 @item --sort-common
2012 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2013 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2014 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2015 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2016 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2017 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2018 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2019 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2020
2021 @kindex --sort-section=name
2022 @item --sort-section=name
2023 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2024 patterns in the linker script.
2025
2026 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2027 @item --sort-section=alignment
2028 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2029 patterns in the linker script.
2030
2031 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2032 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2033 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2034 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2035 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2036
2037 @kindex --split-by-file
2038 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2039 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2040 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2041 size of 1 if not given.
2042
2043 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2044 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2045 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2046 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2047 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2048 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2049 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2050 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2051 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2052 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2053 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2054 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2055
2056 @kindex --stats
2057 @item --stats
2058 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2059 as execution time and memory usage.
2060
2061 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2062 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2063 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2064 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2065 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2066
2067 @kindex --task-link
2068 @item --task-link
2069 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2070 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2071
2072 @kindex --traditional-format
2073 @cindex traditional format
2074 @item --traditional-format
2075 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2076 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2077 use the traditional format instead.
2078
2079 @cindex dbx
2080 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2081 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2082 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2083 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2084 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2085 combine duplicate entries.
2086
2087 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2088 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2089 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2090 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2091 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2092 line.
2093 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2094 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2095 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2096 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2097 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2098
2099 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2100 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2101 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2102 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2103 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2104 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2105 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2106 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2107 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2108
2109 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2110 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2111 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2112 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2113 byte of the text segment.
2114
2115 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2116 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2117 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2118 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2119 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2120 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2121
2122 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2123 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2124 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2125 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2126 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2127
2128 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2129 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2130 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2131 values for @samp{method}:
2132
2133 @table @samp
2134 @item ignore-all
2135 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2136
2137 @item report-all
2138 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2139
2140 @item ignore-in-object-files
2141 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2142 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2143
2144 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2145 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2146 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2147 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2148 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2149 command line.
2150 @end table
2151
2152 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2153 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2154
2155 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2156 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2157 can change this to a warning.
2158
2159 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2160 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2161 @item --dll-verbose
2162 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2163 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2164 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2165 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2166 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2167
2168 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2169 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2170 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2171 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2172 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2173 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2174 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2175 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2176 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2177 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2178 @xref{WIN32}.
2179
2180 @kindex --warn-common
2181 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2182 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2183 @item --warn-common
2184 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2185 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2186 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2187 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2188 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2189 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2190
2191 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2192
2193 @table @samp
2194 @item int i = 1;
2195 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2196 file.
2197
2198 @item extern int i;
2199 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2200 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2201 variable somewhere.
2202
2203 @item int i;
2204 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2205 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2206 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2207 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2208 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2209 a definition of the same variable.
2210 @end table
2211
2212 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2213 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2214 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2215 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2216 a common symbol.
2217
2218 @enumerate
2219 @item
2220 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2221 definition for the symbol.
2222 @smallexample
2223 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2224 overridden by definition
2225 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2226 @end smallexample
2227
2228 @item
2229 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2230 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2231 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2232 @smallexample
2233 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2234 overriding common
2235 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2236 @end smallexample
2237
2238 @item
2239 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2240 @smallexample
2241 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2242 of `@var{symbol}'
2243 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2244 @end smallexample
2245
2246 @item
2247 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2248 @smallexample
2249 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2250 overridden by larger common
2251 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2252 @end smallexample
2253
2254 @item
2255 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2256 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2257 encountered in a different order.
2258 @smallexample
2259 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2260 overriding smaller common
2261 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2262 @end smallexample
2263 @end enumerate
2264
2265 @kindex --warn-constructors
2266 @item --warn-constructors
2267 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2268 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2269 detect the use of global constructors.
2270
2271 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2272 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2273 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2274 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2275 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2276 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2277 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2278 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2279 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2280 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2281 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2282 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2283 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2284
2285 @kindex --warn-once
2286 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2287 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2288 @item --warn-once
2289 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2290 which refers to it.
2291
2292 @kindex --warn-section-align
2293 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2294 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2295 @item --warn-section-align
2296 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2297 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2298 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2299 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2300 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2301
2302 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2303 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2304 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2305
2306 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2307 @item --warn-alternate-em
2308 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2309
2310 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2311 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2312 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2313 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2314 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2315
2316 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2317 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2318 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2319 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2320
2321 @kindex --whole-archive
2322 @cindex including an entire archive
2323 @item --whole-archive
2324 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2325 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2326 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2327 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2328 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2329 library. This option may be used more than once.
2330
2331 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2332 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2333 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2334 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2335 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2336
2337 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2338 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2339 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2340 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2341 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2342 @var{symbol}.
2343
2344 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2345 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2346 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2347 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2348
2349 Here is a trivial example:
2350
2351 @smallexample
2352 void *
2353 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2354 @{
2355 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2356 return __real_malloc (c);
2357 @}
2358 @end smallexample
2359
2360 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2361 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2362 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2363 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2364
2365 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2366 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2367 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2368 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2369 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2370
2371 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2372 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2373 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2374 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2375 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2376 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2377 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2378
2379 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2380 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2381 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2382 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2383 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2384
2385 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2386 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2387 @item --enable-new-dtags
2388 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2389 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2390 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2391 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2392 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2393 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2394 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2395 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2396
2397 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2398 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2399 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2400 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2401 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2402 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2403 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2404
2405 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2406 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2407 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2408 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2409 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2410 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2411 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2412
2413 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2414 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2415 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2416 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2417 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2418 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2419 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2420 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2421 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2422 compressed using zlib.
2423
2424 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2425 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2426 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2427 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2428 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2429 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2430
2431 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2432 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2433
2434 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2435 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2436 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2437 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2438
2439 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2440 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2441 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2442 @option{--help} option.
2443
2444 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2445 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2446 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2447 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2448 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2449 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2450
2451 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2452 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2453 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2454 has been used.
2455
2456 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2457 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2458
2459 @kindex --build-id
2460 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2461 @item --build-id
2462 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2463 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2464 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2465 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2466 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2467 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2468 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2469 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2470 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2471 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2472 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2473
2474 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2475 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2476 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2477 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2478 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2479 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2480
2481 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2482 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2483 @end table
2484
2485 @c man end
2486
2487 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2488
2489 @c man begin OPTIONS
2490
2491 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2492 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2493 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2494 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2495 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2496 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2497 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2498 object file).
2499
2500 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2501 support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
2502 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2503 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2504
2505 @table @gcctabopt
2506
2507 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2508 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2509 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2510 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2511 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2512
2513 @kindex --base-file
2514 @item --base-file @var{file}
2515 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2516 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2517 @file{dlltool}.
2518 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2519
2520 @kindex --dll
2521 @item --dll
2522 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2523 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2524 file.
2525 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2526
2527 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2528 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2529 @item --enable-long-section-names
2530 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2531 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2532 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2533 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2534 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2535 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2536 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2537 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2538 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2539 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2540 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2541 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2542 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2543 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2544 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2545 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2546 image and not stripping symbols.
2547 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2548
2549 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2550 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2551 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2552 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2553 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2554 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2555 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2556 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2557 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2558 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2559 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2560 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2561 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2562 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2563 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2564 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2565 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2566 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2567
2568 @kindex --leading-underscore
2569 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2570 @item --leading-underscore
2571 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2572 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2573 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2574 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2575
2576 @cindex DLLs, creating
2577 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2578 @item --export-all-symbols
2579 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2580 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2581 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2582 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2583 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2584 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2585 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2586 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2587 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2588 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2589 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2590 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2591 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2592 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2593 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2594 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2595 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2596 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2597 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2598 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2599 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2600 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2601 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2602
2603 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2604 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2605 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2606 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2607 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2608
2609 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2610 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2611 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2612 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2613
2614 @kindex --file-alignment
2615 @item --file-alignment
2616 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2617 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2618 512.
2619 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2620
2621 @cindex heap size
2622 @kindex --heap
2623 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2624 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2625 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2626 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2627 committed.
2628 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2629
2630 @cindex image base
2631 @kindex --image-base
2632 @item --image-base @var{value}
2633 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2634 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2635 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2636 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2637 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2638 for dlls.
2639 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2640
2641 @kindex --kill-at
2642 @item --kill-at
2643 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2644 symbols before they are exported.
2645 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2646
2647 @kindex --large-address-aware
2648 @item --large-address-aware
2649 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2650 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2651 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2652 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2653 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2654 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2655
2656 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2657 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2658 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2659 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2660 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2661 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2662 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2663
2664 @kindex --major-image-version
2665 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2666 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2667 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2668
2669 @kindex --major-os-version
2670 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2671 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2672 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2673
2674 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2675 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2676 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2677 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2678
2679 @kindex --minor-image-version
2680 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2681 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2682 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2683
2684 @kindex --minor-os-version
2685 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2686 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2687 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2688
2689 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2690 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2691 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2692 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2693
2694 @cindex DEF files, creating
2695 @cindex DLLs, creating
2696 @kindex --output-def
2697 @item --output-def @var{file}
2698 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2699 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2700 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2701 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2702 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2703 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2704
2705 @cindex DLLs, creating
2706 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2707 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2708 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2709 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2710 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2711 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2712 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2713 execution are avoided.
2714 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2715
2716 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2717 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2718 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2719 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2720 default.
2721 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2722
2723 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2724 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2725 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2726 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2727 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2728 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2729 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2730 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2731 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2732 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2733
2734 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2735 @item --enable-auto-import
2736 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2737 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2738 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2739 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2740
2741 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2742 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2743
2744 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2745 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2746 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2747
2748 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2749 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2750 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2751 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2752 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2753
2754 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2755 see this message:
2756
2757 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2758 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2759
2760 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2761 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2762 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2763 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2764 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2765 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2766 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2767 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2768 the warning, and exit.
2769
2770 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2771 data type of the exported variable:
2772
2773 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2774 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2775 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2776
2777 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2778 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2779 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2780 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2781
2782 @example
2783 extern type extern_array[];
2784 extern_array[1] -->
2785 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2786 @end example
2787
2788 or
2789
2790 @example
2791 extern type extern_array[];
2792 extern_array[1] -->
2793 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2794 @end example
2795
2796 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2797 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2798
2799 @example
2800 extern struct s extern_struct;
2801 extern_struct.field -->
2802 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2803 @end example
2804
2805 or
2806
2807 @example
2808 extern long long extern_ll;
2809 extern_ll -->
2810 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2811 @end example
2812
2813 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2814 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2815 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2816 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2817 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2818 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2819 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2820 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2821
2822 Original:
2823 @example
2824 --foo.h
2825 extern int arr[];
2826 --foo.c
2827 #include "foo.h"
2828 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2829 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2830 @}
2831 @end example
2832
2833 Solution 1:
2834 @example
2835 --foo.h
2836 extern int arr[];
2837 --foo.c
2838 #include "foo.h"
2839 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2840 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2841 volatile int *parr = arr;
2842 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2843 @}
2844 @end example
2845
2846 Solution 2:
2847 @example
2848 --foo.h
2849 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2850 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2851 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2852 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2853 #else
2854 #define FOO_IMPORT
2855 #endif
2856 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2857 --foo.c
2858 #include "foo.h"
2859 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2860 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2861 @}
2862 @end example
2863
2864 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2865 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2866 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2867 functions).
2868
2869 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2870 @item --disable-auto-import
2871 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2872 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2873 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2874
2875 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2876 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2877 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2878 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2879 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2880 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2881 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2882
2883 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2884 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2885 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
2886 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2887
2888 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2889 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2890 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2891 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2892
2893 @kindex --section-alignment
2894 @item --section-alignment
2895 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2896 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2897 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2898
2899 @cindex stack size
2900 @kindex --stack
2901 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2902 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2903 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2904 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2905 committed.
2906 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2907
2908 @kindex --subsystem
2909 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2910 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2911 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2912 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2913 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2914 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2915 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2916 @var{which}.
2917 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2918
2919 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2920 of the PE file header:
2921 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2922
2923 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2924 @item --high-entropy-va
2925 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2926 (ASLR).
2927
2928 @kindex --dynamicbase
2929 @item --dynamicbase
2930 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2931 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2932 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2933
2934 @kindex --forceinteg
2935 @item --forceinteg
2936 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2937
2938 @kindex --nxcompat
2939 @item --nxcompat
2940 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2941 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2942
2943 @kindex --no-isolation
2944 @item --no-isolation
2945 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2946
2947 @kindex --no-seh
2948 @item --no-seh
2949 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2950 this image.
2951
2952 @kindex --no-bind
2953 @item --no-bind
2954 Do not bind this image.
2955
2956 @kindex --wdmdriver
2957 @item --wdmdriver
2958 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2959
2960 @kindex --tsaware
2961 @item --tsaware
2962 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2963
2964 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2965 @item --insert-timestamp
2966 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2967 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2968 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2969 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2970 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2971 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2972 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2973 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2974 identically.
2975 @end table
2976
2977 @c man end
2978
2979 @ifset C6X
2980 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2981
2982 @c man begin OPTIONS
2983
2984 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2985 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2986 all executables use an index of 0.
2987
2988 @table @gcctabopt
2989
2990 @kindex --dsbt-size
2991 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2992 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2993 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2994 entries.
2995
2996 @kindex --dsbt-index
2997 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2998 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2999 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3000 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3001 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3002
3003 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3004 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3005 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3006
3007 @end table
3008
3009 @c man end
3010 @end ifset
3011
3012 @ifset CSKY
3013 @subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3014
3015 @c man begin OPTIONS
3016
3017 @table @gcctabopt
3018
3019 @kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3020 @item --branch-stub
3021 This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3022 sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3023 usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3024 can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3025 the compiler or assembler.
3026
3027 @kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3028 @item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3029 This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3030 It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3031 be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3032 stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3033 sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3034 @samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3035 linker should choose suitable defaults.
3036
3037 @end table
3038
3039 @c man end
3040 @end ifset
3041
3042 @ifset M68HC11
3043 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3044
3045 @c man begin OPTIONS
3046
3047 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3048 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3049
3050 @table @gcctabopt
3051
3052 @kindex --no-trampoline
3053 @item --no-trampoline
3054 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3055 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3056 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3057
3058 @kindex --bank-window
3059 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3060 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3061 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3062 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3063 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3064
3065 @end table
3066
3067 @c man end
3068 @end ifset
3069
3070 @ifset M68K
3071 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3072
3073 @c man begin OPTIONS
3074
3075 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3076 when linking for 68K targets.
3077
3078 @table @gcctabopt
3079
3080 @kindex --got
3081 @item --got=@var{type}
3082 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3083 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3084 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3085 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3086
3087 @end table
3088
3089 @c man end
3090 @end ifset
3091
3092 @ifset MIPS
3093 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3094
3095 @c man begin OPTIONS
3096
3097 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3098 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3099 linking for MIPS targets.
3100
3101 @table @gcctabopt
3102
3103 @kindex --insn32
3104 @item --insn32
3105 @kindex --no-insn32
3106 @itemx --no-insn32
3107 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3108 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3109 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3110 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3111 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3112 possible.
3113
3114 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3115 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3116 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3117 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3118 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3119 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3120 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3121 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3122 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3123 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3124 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3125 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3126 an error.
3127
3128 @end table
3129
3130 @c man end
3131 @end ifset
3132
3133 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3134 @node Environment
3135 @section Environment Variables
3136
3137 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3138
3139 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3140 @ifclear SingleFormat
3141 @code{GNUTARGET},
3142 @end ifclear
3143 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3144
3145 @ifclear SingleFormat
3146 @kindex GNUTARGET
3147 @cindex default input format
3148 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3149 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3150 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3151 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3152 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3153 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3154 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3155 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3156 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3157 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3158 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3159 @end ifclear
3160
3161 @kindex LDEMULATION
3162 @cindex default emulation
3163 @cindex emulation, default
3164 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3165 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3166 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3167 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3168 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3169 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3170 linker was configured.
3171
3172 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3173 @cindex demangling, default
3174 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3175 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3176 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3177 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3178 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3179 options.
3180
3181 @c man end
3182 @end ifset
3183
3184 @node Scripts
3185 @chapter Linker Scripts
3186
3187 @cindex scripts
3188 @cindex linker scripts
3189 @cindex command files
3190 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3191 written in the linker command language.
3192
3193 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3194 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3195 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3196 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3197 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3198 described below.
3199
3200 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3201 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3202 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3203 to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
3204 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3205
3206 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3207 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3208 default linker script.
3209
3210 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3211 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3212 Linker Scripts}.
3213
3214 @menu
3215 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3216 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3217 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3218 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3219 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3220 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3221 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3222 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3223 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3224 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3225 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3226 @end menu
3227
3228 @node Basic Script Concepts
3229 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3230 @cindex linker script concepts
3231 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3232 describe the linker script language.
3233
3234 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3235 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3236 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3237 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3238 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3239 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3240 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3241 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3242
3243 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3244 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3245 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3246 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3247 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3248 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3249 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3250 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3251 of debugging information.
3252
3253 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3254 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3255 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3256 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3257 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3258 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3259 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3260 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3261 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3262 RAM address would be the VMA.
3263
3264 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3265 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3266
3267 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3268 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3269 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3270 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3271 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3272 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3273 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3274
3275 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3276 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3277 option.
3278
3279 @node Script Format
3280 @section Linker Script Format
3281 @cindex linker script format
3282 Linker scripts are text files.
3283
3284 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3285 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3286 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3287 generally ignored.
3288
3289 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3290 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3291 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3292 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3293 file name.
3294
3295 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3296 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3297 to whitespace.
3298
3299 @node Simple Example
3300 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3301 @cindex linker script example
3302 @cindex example of linker script
3303 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3304
3305 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3306 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3307 memory layout of the output file.
3308
3309 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3310 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3311 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3312 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3313 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3314 your input files.
3315
3316 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3317 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3318 linker script which will do that:
3319 @smallexample
3320 SECTIONS
3321 @{
3322 . = 0x10000;
3323 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3324 . = 0x8000000;
3325 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3326 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3327 @}
3328 @end smallexample
3329
3330 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3331 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3332 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3333
3334 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3335 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3336 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3337 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3338 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3339 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3340 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3341
3342 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3343 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3344 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3345 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3346 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3347 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3348
3349 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3350 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3351 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3352
3353 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3354 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3355 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3356 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3357 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3358 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3359 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3360
3361 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3362 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3363 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3364 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3365 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3366 sections.
3367
3368 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3369
3370 @node Simple Commands
3371 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3372 @cindex linker script simple commands
3373 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3374
3375 @menu
3376 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3377 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3378 @ifclear SingleFormat
3379 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3380 @end ifclear
3381
3382 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3383 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3384 @end menu
3385
3386 @node Entry Point
3387 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3388 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3389 @cindex start of execution
3390 @cindex first instruction
3391 @cindex entry point
3392 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3393 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3394 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3395 @smallexample
3396 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3397 @end smallexample
3398
3399 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3400 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3401 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3402 @itemize @bullet
3403 @item
3404 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3405 @item
3406 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3407 @item
3408 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3409 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3410 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3411 @item
3412 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3413 @item
3414 The address @code{0}.
3415 @end itemize
3416
3417 @node File Commands
3418 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3419 @cindex linker script file commands
3420 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3421
3422 @table @code
3423 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3424 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3425 @cindex including a linker script
3426 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3427 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3428 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3429 10 levels deep.
3430
3431 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3432 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3433
3434 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3435 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3436 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3437 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3438 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3439 @cindex linker script input object files
3440 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3441 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3442
3443 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3444 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3445 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3446
3447 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3448 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3449
3450 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3451 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3452 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3453 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3454 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3455 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3456 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3457 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3458 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3459 @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3460
3461 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3462 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
3463 @samp{-l}.
3464
3465 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3466 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3467 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3468
3469 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3470 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3471 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3472 @cindex grouping input files
3473 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3474 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3475 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3476 in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3477
3478 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3479 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3480 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3481 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3482 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3483 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3484 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3485 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3486 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3487 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3488 setting afterwards.
3489
3490 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3491 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3492 @cindex output file name in linker script
3493 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3494 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3495 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3496 Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
3497 precedence.
3498
3499 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3500 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3501
3502 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3503 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3504 @cindex library search path in linker script
3505 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3506 @cindex search path in linker script
3507 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3508 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3509 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3510 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
3511 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3512 the command-line option are searched first.
3513
3514 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3515 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3516 @cindex first input file
3517 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3518 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3519 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3520 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3521 first file.
3522 @end table
3523
3524 @ifclear SingleFormat
3525 @node Format Commands
3526 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3527 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3528
3529 @table @code
3530 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3531 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3532 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3533 @cindex output file format in linker script
3534 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3535 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3536 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3537 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
3538 line option takes precedence.
3539
3540 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3541 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
3542 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3543 desired endianness.
3544
3545 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3546 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3547 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3548 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3549
3550 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3551 command:
3552 @smallexample
3553 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3554 @end smallexample
3555 This says that the default format for the output file is
3556 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
3557 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3558 format.
3559
3560 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3561 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3562 @cindex input file format in linker script
3563 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3564 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3565 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3566 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3567 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3568 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3569 @end table
3570 @end ifclear
3571
3572 @node REGION_ALIAS
3573 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3574 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3575 @cindex region alias
3576 @cindex region names
3577
3578 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3579 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3580
3581 @smallexample
3582 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3583 @end smallexample
3584
3585 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3586 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3587 to memory regions. An example follows.
3588
3589 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3590 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3591 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3592 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3593 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3594 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3595 sections:
3596
3597 @itemize @bullet
3598 @item
3599 @code{.text} program code;
3600 @item
3601 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3602 @item
3603 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3604 @item
3605 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3606 @end itemize
3607
3608 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3609 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3610 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3611 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3612 @code{C}:
3613 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3614 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3615 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3616 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3617 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3618 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3619 @end multitable
3620 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3621 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3622 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3623 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3624
3625 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3626 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3627 memory layout:
3628 @smallexample
3629 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3630
3631 SECTIONS
3632 @{
3633 .text :
3634 @{
3635 *(.text)
3636 @} > REGION_TEXT
3637 .rodata :
3638 @{
3639 *(.rodata)
3640 rodata_end = .;
3641 @} > REGION_RODATA
3642 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3643 @{
3644 data_start = .;
3645 *(.data)
3646 @} > REGION_DATA
3647 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3648 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3649 .bss :
3650 @{
3651 *(.bss)
3652 @} > REGION_BSS
3653 @}
3654 @end smallexample
3655
3656 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3657 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3658 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3659 @table @code
3660 @item A
3661 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3662 @smallexample
3663 MEMORY
3664 @{
3665 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3666 @}
3667
3668 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3669 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3670 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3671 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3672 @end smallexample
3673 @item B
3674 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3675 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3676 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3677 @smallexample
3678 MEMORY
3679 @{
3680 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3681 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3682 @}
3683
3684 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3685 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3686 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3687 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3688 @end smallexample
3689 @item C
3690 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3691 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3692 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3693 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3694 @smallexample
3695 MEMORY
3696 @{
3697 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3698 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3699 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3700 @}
3701
3702 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3703 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3704 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3705 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3706 @end smallexample
3707 @end table
3708
3709 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3710 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3711 necessary:
3712 @smallexample
3713 #include <string.h>
3714
3715 extern char data_start [];
3716 extern char data_size [];
3717 extern char data_load_start [];
3718
3719 void copy_data(void)
3720 @{
3721 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3722 @{
3723 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3724 @}
3725 @}
3726 @end smallexample
3727
3728 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3729 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3730 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3731
3732 @table @code
3733 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3734 @kindex ASSERT
3735 @cindex assertion in linker script
3736 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3737 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3738
3739 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3740 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3741 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3742 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3743 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3744
3745 @smallexample
3746 .stack :
3747 @{
3748 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3749 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3750 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3751 @}
3752 @end smallexample
3753
3754 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3755 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3756 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3757
3758 @smallexample
3759 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3760 .stack :
3761 @{
3762 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3763 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3764 @}
3765 @end smallexample
3766
3767 will work.
3768
3769 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3770 @kindex EXTERN
3771 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3772 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3773 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3774 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3775 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3776 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3777
3778 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3779 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3780 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3781 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3782 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3783 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3784
3785 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3786 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3787 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3788 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3789 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3790 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3791
3792 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3793 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3794 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3795 @cindex section groups
3796 @cindex COMDAT
3797 This command has the same effect as the
3798 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3799 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3800 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3801 specified (@samp{-r}).
3802
3803 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3804 @kindex INSERT
3805 @cindex insert user script into default script
3806 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3807 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3808 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3809 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3810 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3811 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3812 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3813 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3814 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3815 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3816 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3817 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3818 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3819
3820 @smallexample
3821 SECTIONS
3822 @{
3823 OVERLAY :
3824 @{
3825 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3826 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3827 @}
3828 @}
3829 INSERT AFTER .text;
3830 @end smallexample
3831
3832 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3833 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3834 @cindex cross references
3835 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3836 references among certain output sections.
3837
3838 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3839 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3840 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3841 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3842 a function defined in the other section.
3843
3844 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3845 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3846 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3847 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3848 names.
3849
3850 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3851 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3852 @cindex cross references
3853 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3854 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3855
3856 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3857 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3858 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3859 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3860 must never call back.
3861
3862 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3863 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3864 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3865 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3866 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3867 names, not input section names.
3868
3869 @ifclear SingleFormat
3870 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3871 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3872 @cindex machine architecture
3873 @cindex architecture
3874 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3875 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3876 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3877 the @samp{-f} option.
3878 @end ifclear
3879
3880 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3881 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3882 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3883 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3884 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3885 @xref{Expression Section}.
3886 @end table
3887
3888 @node Assignments
3889 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3890 @cindex assignment in scripts
3891 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3892 @cindex variables, defining
3893 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3894 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3895
3896 @menu
3897 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3898 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3899 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3900 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3901 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3902 @end menu
3903
3904 @node Simple Assignments
3905 @subsection Simple Assignments
3906
3907 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3908
3909 @table @code
3910 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3911 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3912 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3913 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3914 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3915 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3916 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3917 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3918 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3919 @end table
3920
3921 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3922 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3923 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3924
3925 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3926 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3927
3928 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3929
3930 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3931
3932 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3933 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3934 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3935
3936 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3937 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3938
3939 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3940 assignments may be used:
3941
3942 @smallexample
3943 floating_point = 0;
3944 SECTIONS
3945 @{
3946 .text :
3947 @{
3948 *(.text)
3949 _etext = .;
3950 @}
3951 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3952 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3953 @}
3954 @end smallexample
3955 @noindent
3956 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3957 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3958 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3959 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3960 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3961
3962 @node HIDDEN
3963 @subsection HIDDEN
3964 @cindex HIDDEN
3965 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3966 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3967
3968 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3969 @code{HIDDEN}:
3970
3971 @smallexample
3972 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3973 SECTIONS
3974 @{
3975 .text :
3976 @{
3977 *(.text)
3978 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3979 @}
3980 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3981 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3982 @}
3983 @end smallexample
3984 @noindent
3985 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3986
3987 @node PROVIDE
3988 @subsection PROVIDE
3989 @cindex PROVIDE
3990 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3991 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3992 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3993 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3994 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3995 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3996 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3997 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3998
3999 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4000 @smallexample
4001 SECTIONS
4002 @{
4003 .text :
4004 @{
4005 *(.text)
4006 _etext = .;
4007 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4008 @}
4009 @}
4010 @end smallexample
4011
4012 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4013 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4014 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4015 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4016 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4017 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4018
4019 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4020 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4021 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4022 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4023 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4024
4025 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4026 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4027 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4028 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4029 hidden and won't be exported.
4030
4031 @node Source Code Reference
4032 @subsection Source Code Reference
4033
4034 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4035 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4036 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4037 symbol that does not have a value.
4038
4039 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4040 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4041 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4042 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4043 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4044 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4045 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4046 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4047
4048 @smallexample
4049 extern int foo;
4050 @end smallexample
4051
4052 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4053
4054 @smallexample
4055 _foo = 1000;
4056 @end smallexample
4057
4058 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4059 transformation has taken place.
4060
4061 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4062 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4063 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4064 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4065 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4066 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4067 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4068
4069 @smallexample
4070 int foo = 1000;
4071 @end smallexample
4072
4073 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4074 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4075 number 1000 is initially stored.
4076
4077 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4078 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4079 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4080 So:
4081
4082 @smallexample
4083 foo = 1;
4084 @end smallexample
4085
4086 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4087 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4088 address. Whereas:
4089
4090 @smallexample
4091 int * a = & foo;
4092 @end smallexample
4093
4094 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4095 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4096 the variable @samp{a}.
4097
4098 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4099 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4100 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4101
4102 @smallexample
4103 foo = 1000;
4104 @end smallexample
4105
4106 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4107 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4108 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4109 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4110 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4111
4112 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4113 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4114 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4115 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4116 linker script contains these declarations:
4117
4118 @smallexample
4119 @group
4120 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4121 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4122 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4123 @end group
4124 @end smallexample
4125
4126 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4127
4128 @smallexample
4129 @group
4130 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4131
4132 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4133 @end group
4134 @end smallexample
4135
4136 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4137 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4138 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4139
4140 @smallexample
4141 @group
4142 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4143
4144 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4145 @end group
4146 @end smallexample
4147
4148 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4149 operators.
4150
4151 @node SECTIONS
4152 @section SECTIONS Command
4153 @kindex SECTIONS
4154 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4155 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4156
4157 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4158 @smallexample
4159 SECTIONS
4160 @{
4161 @var{sections-command}
4162 @var{sections-command}
4163 @dots{}
4164 @}
4165 @end smallexample
4166
4167 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4168
4169 @itemize @bullet
4170 @item
4171 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4172 @item
4173 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4174 @item
4175 an output section description
4176 @item
4177 an overlay description
4178 @end itemize
4179
4180 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4181 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4182 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4183 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4184 the layout of the output file.
4185
4186 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4187 below.
4188
4189 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4190 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4191 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4192 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4193 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4194 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4195
4196 @menu
4197 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4198 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4199 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4200 * Input Section:: Input section description
4201 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4202 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4203 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4204 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4205 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4206 @end menu
4207
4208 @node Output Section Description
4209 @subsection Output Section Description
4210 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4211 @smallexample
4212 @group
4213 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4214 [AT(@var{lma})]
4215 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4216 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4217 [@var{constraint}]
4218 @{
4219 @var{output-section-command}
4220 @var{output-section-command}
4221 @dots{}
4222 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4223 @end group
4224 @end smallexample
4225
4226 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4227
4228 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4229 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4230 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4231 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4232 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4233
4234 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4235
4236 @itemize @bullet
4237 @item
4238 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4239 @item
4240 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4241 @item
4242 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4243 @item
4244 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4245 @end itemize
4246
4247 @node Output Section Name
4248 @subsection Output Section Name
4249 @cindex name, section
4250 @cindex section name
4251 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4252 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4253 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4254 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4255 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4256 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4257 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4258 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4259 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4260 commas must be quoted.
4261
4262 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4263 Discarding}.
4264
4265 @node Output Section Address
4266 @subsection Output Section Address
4267 @cindex address, section
4268 @cindex section address
4269 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4270 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4271 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4272
4273 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4274 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4275 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4276 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4277 contained within the output section.
4278
4279 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4280
4281 @itemize @bullet
4282 @item
4283 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4284 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4285 in that region.
4286
4287 @item
4288 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4289 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4290 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4291 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4292
4293 @item
4294 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4295 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4296 counter.
4297 @end itemize
4298
4299 @noindent
4300 For example:
4301
4302 @smallexample
4303 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4304 @end smallexample
4305
4306 @noindent
4307 and
4308
4309 @smallexample
4310 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4311 @end smallexample
4312
4313 @noindent
4314 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4315 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4316 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4317 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4318 input sections.
4319
4320 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4321 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4322 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4323 do something like this:
4324 @smallexample
4325 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4326 @end smallexample
4327 @noindent
4328 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4329 aligned upward to the specified value.
4330
4331 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4332 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4333 sections are ignored).
4334
4335 @node Input Section
4336 @subsection Input Section Description
4337 @cindex input sections
4338 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4339 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4340
4341 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4342 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4343 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4344 map the input files into your memory layout.
4345
4346 @menu
4347 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4348 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4349 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4350 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4351 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4352 @end menu
4353
4354 @node Input Section Basics
4355 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4356 @cindex input section basics
4357 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4358 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4359
4360 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4361 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4362
4363 The most common input section description is to include all input
4364 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4365 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4366 @smallexample
4367 *(.text)
4368 @end smallexample
4369 @noindent
4370 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4371 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4372 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4373 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4374 example:
4375 @smallexample
4376 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4377 @end smallexample
4378 @noindent
4379 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4380 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4381 placed inside the section list, for example:
4382 @smallexample
4383 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4384 @end smallexample
4385 @noindent
4386 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4387 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4388 more than one section, as described below.
4389
4390 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4391 @smallexample
4392 *(.text .rdata)
4393 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4394 @end smallexample
4395 @noindent
4396 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4397 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4398 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4399 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4400 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4401 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4402
4403 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4404 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4405 immediately following section, for example:
4406 @smallexample
4407 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4408 @end smallexample
4409 @noindent
4410 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4411 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4412 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4413 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4414 could be modified to:
4415 @smallexample
4416 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4417 @end smallexample
4418 @noindent
4419 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4420 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4421 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4422 @smallexample
4423 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4424 @end smallexample
4425
4426 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4427 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4428 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4429 @smallexample
4430 data.o(.data)
4431 @end smallexample
4432
4433 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4434 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4435
4436 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4437
4438 @smallexample
4439 @group
4440 SECTIONS @{
4441 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4442 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4443 @}
4444 @end group
4445 @end smallexample
4446
4447 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4448 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4449 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4450 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4451 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4452
4453 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4454 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4455 with no whitespace around the colon.
4456
4457 @table @samp
4458 @item archive:file
4459 matches file within archive
4460 @item archive:
4461 matches the whole archive
4462 @item :file
4463 matches file but not one in an archive
4464 @end table
4465
4466 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4467 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4468 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4469 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4470 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4471 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4472 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4473 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4474 command.
4475
4476 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4477 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4478 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4479 @smallexample
4480 data.o
4481 @end smallexample
4482
4483 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4484 and does not contain any wild card
4485 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4486 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4487 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4488 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4489 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4490 the archive search path.
4491
4492 @node Input Section Wildcards
4493 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4494 @cindex input section wildcards
4495 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4496 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4497 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4498 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4499 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4500
4501 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4502 pattern for the file name.
4503
4504 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4505
4506 @table @samp
4507 @item *
4508 matches any number of characters
4509 @item ?
4510 matches any single character
4511 @item [@var{chars}]
4512 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4513 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4514 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4515 @item \
4516 quotes the following character
4517 @end table
4518
4519 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4520 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4521 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4522 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4523 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4524 a @samp{/} character.
4525
4526 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4527 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4528 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4529
4530 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4531 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4532 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4533 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4534 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4535 @smallexample
4536 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4537 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4538 @end smallexample
4539
4540 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4541 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4542 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4543 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4544 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4545 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4546 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4547
4548 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4549 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4550 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4551 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4552 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4553 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4554
4555 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4556 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4557 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4558 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4559 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4560
4561 @cindex SORT
4562 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4563
4564 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4565 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4566
4567 @enumerate
4568 @item
4569 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4570 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4571 sections have the same name.
4572 @item
4573 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4574 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4575 sections have the same alignment.
4576 @item
4577 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4578 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4579 @item
4580 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4581 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4582 @item
4583 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4584 @end enumerate
4585
4586 When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
4587 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4588 takes precedence over the command-line option.
4589
4590 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4591 command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
4592 treated as nested sorting command.
4593
4594 @enumerate
4595 @item
4596 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4597 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4598 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4599 @item
4600 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4601 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4602 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4603 @end enumerate
4604
4605 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4606 command-line option will be ignored.
4607
4608 @cindex SORT_NONE
4609 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
4610 section sorting option.
4611
4612 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4613 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4614 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4615
4616 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4617 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4618 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4619 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4620 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4621 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4622 @smallexample
4623 @group
4624 SECTIONS @{
4625 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4626 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4627 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4628 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4629 @}
4630 @end group
4631 @end smallexample
4632
4633 @node Input Section Common
4634 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4635 @cindex common symbol placement
4636 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4637 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4638 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4639 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4640 named @samp{COMMON}.
4641
4642 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4643 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4644 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4645 input files are placed in another section.
4646
4647 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4648 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4649 @smallexample
4650 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4651 @end smallexample
4652
4653 @cindex scommon section
4654 @cindex small common symbols
4655 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4656 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4657 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4658 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4659 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4660 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4661 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4662 locations.
4663
4664 @cindex [COMMON]
4665 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4666 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4667 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4668
4669 @node Input Section Keep
4670 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4671 @cindex KEEP
4672 @cindex garbage collection
4673 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4674 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4675 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4676 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4677 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4678
4679 @node Input Section Example
4680 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4681 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4682 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4683 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4684 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4685 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4686 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4687 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4688 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4689 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4690
4691 @smallexample
4692 @group
4693 SECTIONS @{
4694 outputa 0x10000 :
4695 @{
4696 all.o
4697 foo.o (.input1)
4698 @}
4699 @end group
4700 @group
4701 outputb :
4702 @{
4703 foo.o (.input2)
4704 foo1.o (.input1)
4705 @}
4706 @end group
4707 @group
4708 outputc :
4709 @{
4710 *(.input1)
4711 *(.input2)
4712 @}
4713 @}
4714 @end group
4715 @end smallexample
4716
4717 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4718 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4719 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4720 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4721 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4722 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4723 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4724
4725 @node Output Section Data
4726 @subsection Output Section Data
4727 @cindex data
4728 @cindex section data
4729 @cindex output section data
4730 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4731 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4732 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4733 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4734 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4735 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4736 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4737 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4738 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4739 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4740 counter.
4741
4742 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4743 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4744 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4745 stored.
4746
4747 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4748 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4749 @smallexample
4750 BYTE(1)
4751 LONG(addr)
4752 @end smallexample
4753
4754 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4755 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4756 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4757 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4758 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4759
4760 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4761 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4762 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4763 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4764 endianness of the first input object file.
4765
4766 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4767 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4768 @smallexample
4769 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4770 @end smallexample
4771 whereas this will work:
4772 @smallexample
4773 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4774 @end smallexample
4775
4776 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4777 @cindex holes, filling
4778 @cindex unspecified memory
4779 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4780 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4781 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4782 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4783 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4784 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4785 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4786 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4787 different parts of an output section.
4788
4789 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4790 value @samp{0x90}:
4791 @smallexample
4792 FILL(0x90909090)
4793 @end smallexample
4794
4795 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4796 section attribute, but it only affects the
4797 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4798 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4799 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4800 expression.
4801
4802 @node Output Section Keywords
4803 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4804 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4805 commands.
4806
4807 @table @code
4808 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4809 @cindex input filename symbols
4810 @cindex filename symbols
4811 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4812 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4813 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4814 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4815 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4816
4817 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4818 normally used for any other object file format.
4819
4820 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4821 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4822 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4823 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4824 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4825 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4826 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4827 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4828 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4829 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4830 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4831 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4832 ignored for other object file formats.
4833
4834 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4835 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4836 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4837 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4838 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4839 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4840 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4841 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4842 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4843 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4844 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4845 @code{exit}.
4846
4847 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4848 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4849 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4850 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4851 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4852 runtime code expects to see.
4853
4854 @smallexample
4855 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4856 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4857 *(.ctors)
4858 LONG(0)
4859 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4860 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4861 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4862 *(.dtors)
4863 LONG(0)
4864 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4865 @end smallexample
4866
4867 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4868 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4869 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4870 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4871 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4872 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4873 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4874 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4875
4876 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4877 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4878 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4879 scripts.
4880
4881 @end table
4882
4883 @node Output Section Discarding
4884 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4885 @cindex discarding sections
4886 @cindex sections, discarding
4887 @cindex removing sections
4888 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4889 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4890 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4891 @smallexample
4892 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4893 @end smallexample
4894 @noindent
4895 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4896 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4897 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4898 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4899 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4900 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4901 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4902 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4903 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4904
4905 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4906 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4907 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4908 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4909 section is discarded.
4910
4911 @cindex /DISCARD/
4912 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4913 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4914 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4915
4916 @node Output Section Attributes
4917 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4918 @cindex output section attributes
4919 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4920 like this:
4921
4922 @smallexample
4923 @group
4924 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4925 [AT(@var{lma})]
4926 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4927 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4928 [@var{constraint}]
4929 @{
4930 @var{output-section-command}
4931 @var{output-section-command}
4932 @dots{}
4933 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4934 @end group
4935 @end smallexample
4936
4937 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4938 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4939 remaining section attributes.
4940
4941 @menu
4942 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4943 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4944 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4945 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4946 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4947 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4948 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4949 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4950 @end menu
4951
4952 @node Output Section Type
4953 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4954 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4955 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4956
4957 @table @code
4958 @item NOLOAD
4959 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4960 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4961 @item DSECT
4962 @itemx COPY
4963 @itemx INFO
4964 @itemx OVERLAY
4965 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4966 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4967 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4968 section when the program is run.
4969 @end table
4970
4971 @kindex NOLOAD
4972 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4973 @cindex loading, preventing
4974 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4975 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4976 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4977 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4978 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4979 @smallexample
4980 @group
4981 SECTIONS @{
4982 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4983 @dots{}
4984 @}
4985 @end group
4986 @end smallexample
4987
4988 @node Output Section LMA
4989 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4990 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4991 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4992 @cindex load address
4993 @cindex section load address
4994 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4995 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4996 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4997 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4998 address is optional.
4999
5000 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5001 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5002 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5003 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5004 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
5005
5006 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
5007 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5008 load address:
5009
5010 @itemize @bullet
5011 @item
5012 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5013 the LMA address as well.
5014
5015 @item
5016 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5017
5018 @item
5019 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5020 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5021 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5022 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5023 the last section in the located region.
5024
5025 @item
5026 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5027 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5028
5029 @item
5030 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5031 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5032 @end itemize
5033
5034 @cindex ROM initialized data
5035 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5036 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5037 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5038 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5039 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5040 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5041 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5042 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5043 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5044
5045 @smallexample
5046 @group
5047 SECTIONS
5048 @{
5049 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5050 .mdata 0x2000 :
5051 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5052 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5053 .bss 0x3000 :
5054 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5055 @}
5056 @end group
5057 @end smallexample
5058
5059 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5060 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5061 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5062 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5063 script.
5064
5065 @smallexample
5066 @group
5067 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5068 char *src = &_etext;
5069 char *dst = &_data;
5070
5071 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5072 while (dst < &_edata)
5073 *dst++ = *src++;
5074
5075 /* Zero bss. */
5076 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5077 *dst = 0;
5078 @end group
5079 @end smallexample
5080
5081 @node Forced Output Alignment
5082 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5083 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5084 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5085 @cindex output section alignment
5086 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5087 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5088 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5089
5090 @node Forced Input Alignment
5091 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5092 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5093 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5094 @cindex input section alignment
5095 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5096 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5097 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5098
5099 @node Output Section Constraint
5100 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5101 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5102 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5103 @cindex constraints on output sections
5104 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5105 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5106 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5107 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5108
5109 @node Output Section Region
5110 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5111 @kindex >@var{region}
5112 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5113 @cindex memory regions and sections
5114 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5115 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5116
5117 Here is a simple example:
5118 @smallexample
5119 @group
5120 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5121 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5122 @end group
5123 @end smallexample
5124
5125 @node Output Section Phdr
5126 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5127 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5128 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5129 @cindex program headers and sections
5130 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5131 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5132 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5133 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5134 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5135 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5136
5137 Here is a simple example:
5138 @smallexample
5139 @group
5140 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5141 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5142 @end group
5143 @end smallexample
5144
5145 @node Output Section Fill
5146 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5147 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5148 @cindex section fill pattern
5149 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5150 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5151 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5152 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5153 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5154 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5155 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5156 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5157 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5158 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5159 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5160 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5161 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5162
5163 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5164 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5165
5166 Here is a simple example:
5167 @smallexample
5168 @group
5169 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5170 @end group
5171 @end smallexample
5172
5173 @node Overlay Description
5174 @subsection Overlay Description
5175 @kindex OVERLAY
5176 @cindex overlays
5177 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5178 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5179 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5180 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5181 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5182 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5183 than another.
5184
5185 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5186 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5187 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5188 command is as follows:
5189 @smallexample
5190 @group
5191 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5192 @{
5193 @var{secname1}
5194 @{
5195 @var{output-section-command}
5196 @var{output-section-command}
5197 @dots{}
5198 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5199 @var{secname2}
5200 @{
5201 @var{output-section-command}
5202 @var{output-section-command}
5203 @dots{}
5204 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5205 @dots{}
5206 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5207 @end group
5208 @end smallexample
5209
5210 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5211 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5212 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5213 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5214 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5215 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5216
5217 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5218 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5219
5220 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5221 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5222 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5223 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5224 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5225 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5226
5227 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5228 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5229 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5230 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5231 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5232
5233 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5234 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5235 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5236 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5237 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5238 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5239 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5240
5241 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5242 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5243
5244 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5245 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5246 @smallexample
5247 @group
5248 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5249 @{
5250 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5251 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5252 @}
5253 @end group
5254 @end smallexample
5255 @noindent
5256 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5257 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5258 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5259 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5260 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5261 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5262
5263 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5264 like the following.
5265
5266 @smallexample
5267 @group
5268 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5269 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5270 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5271 @end group
5272 @end smallexample
5273
5274 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5275 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5276 example could have been written identically as follows.
5277
5278 @smallexample
5279 @group
5280 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5281 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5282 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5283 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5284 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5285 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5286 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5287 @end group
5288 @end smallexample
5289
5290 @node MEMORY
5291 @section MEMORY Command
5292 @kindex MEMORY
5293 @cindex memory regions
5294 @cindex regions of memory
5295 @cindex allocating memory
5296 @cindex discontinuous memory
5297 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5298 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5299
5300 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5301 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5302 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5303 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5304 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5305 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5306 around to fit into the available regions.
5307
5308 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5309 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5310 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5311 @code{MEMORY} is:
5312 @smallexample
5313 @group
5314 MEMORY
5315 @{
5316 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5317 @dots{}
5318 @}
5319 @end group
5320 @end smallexample
5321
5322 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5323 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5324 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5325 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5326 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5327 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5328 command.
5329
5330 @cindex memory region attributes
5331 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5332 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5333 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5334 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5335 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5336 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5337 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5338
5339 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5340 @table @samp
5341 @item R
5342 Read-only section
5343 @item W
5344 Read/write section
5345 @item X
5346 Executable section
5347 @item A
5348 Allocatable section
5349 @item I
5350 Initialized section
5351 @item L
5352 Same as @samp{I}
5353 @item !
5354 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5355 @end table
5356
5357 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5358 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5359 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5360 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5361 attributes.
5362
5363 @kindex ORIGIN =
5364 @kindex o =
5365 @kindex org =
5366 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5367 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5368 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5369 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5370 @code{ORG}).
5371
5372 @kindex LENGTH =
5373 @kindex len =
5374 @kindex l =
5375 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5376 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5377 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5378 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5379
5380 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5381 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5382 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5383 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5384 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5385 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5386 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5387 region.
5388
5389 @smallexample
5390 @group
5391 MEMORY
5392 @{
5393 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5394 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5395 @}
5396 @end group
5397 @end smallexample
5398
5399 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5400 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5401 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5402 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5403 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5404 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5405 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5406 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5407 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5408
5409 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5410 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5411 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5412
5413 @smallexample
5414 @group
5415 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5416 @end group
5417 @end smallexample
5418
5419 @node PHDRS
5420 @section PHDRS Command
5421 @kindex PHDRS
5422 @cindex program headers
5423 @cindex ELF program headers
5424 @cindex program segments
5425 @cindex segments, ELF
5426 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5427 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5428 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5429 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5430
5431 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5432 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5433 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5434 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5435 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5436
5437 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5438 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5439 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5440 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5441 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5442
5443 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5444 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5445 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5446
5447 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5448 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5449
5450 @smallexample
5451 @group
5452 PHDRS
5453 @{
5454 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5455 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5456 @}
5457 @end group
5458 @end smallexample
5459
5460 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5461 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5462 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5463 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5464 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5465 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5466
5467 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5468 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5469 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5470 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5471 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5472 Section Phdr}.
5473
5474 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5475 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5476 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5477 contain the section.
5478
5479 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5480 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5481 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5482 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5483 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5484 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5485 segment at all.
5486
5487 @kindex FILEHDR
5488 @kindex PHDRS
5489 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5490 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5491 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5492 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5493 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5494 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5495 these keywords.
5496
5497 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5498 value of the keyword.
5499
5500 @table @asis
5501 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5502 Indicates an unused program header.
5503
5504 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5505 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5506 the file.
5507
5508 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5509 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5510
5511 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5512 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5513 found.
5514
5515 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5516 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5517
5518 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5519 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5520 ABI.
5521
5522 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5523 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5524
5525 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5526 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5527
5528 @item @var{expression}
5529 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5530 be used for types not defined above.
5531 @end table
5532
5533 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5534 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5535 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5536 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5537 output section attribute.
5538
5539 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5540 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5541 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5542 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5543 header.
5544
5545 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5546 headers used on a native ELF system.
5547
5548 @example
5549 @group
5550 PHDRS
5551 @{
5552 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5553 interp PT_INTERP ;
5554 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5555 data PT_LOAD ;
5556 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5557 @}
5558
5559 SECTIONS
5560 @{
5561 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5562 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5563 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5564 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5565 @dots{}
5566 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5567 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5568 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5569 @dots{}
5570 @}
5571 @end group
5572 @end example
5573
5574 @node VERSION
5575 @section VERSION Command
5576 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5577 @cindex symbol versions
5578 @cindex version script
5579 @cindex versions of symbols
5580 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5581 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5582 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5583 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5584 shared library.
5585
5586 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5587 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5588 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5589
5590 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5591 @smallexample
5592 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5593 @end smallexample
5594
5595 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5596 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5597 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5598 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5599 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5600 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5601 library.
5602
5603 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5604 examples.
5605
5606 @smallexample
5607 VERS_1.1 @{
5608 global:
5609 foo1;
5610 local:
5611 old*;
5612 original*;
5613 new*;
5614 @};
5615
5616 VERS_1.2 @{
5617 foo2;
5618 @} VERS_1.1;
5619
5620 VERS_2.0 @{
5621 bar1; bar2;
5622 extern "C++" @{
5623 ns::*;
5624 "f(int, double)";
5625 @};
5626 @} VERS_1.2;
5627 @end smallexample
5628
5629 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5630 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5631 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5632 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5633 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5634 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5635 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5636 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5637 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5638 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5639
5640 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5641 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5642 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5643
5644 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5645 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5646 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5647
5648 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5649 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5650 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5651 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5652 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5653 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5654 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5655 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5656 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5657
5658 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5659 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5660 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5661 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5662
5663 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5664 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5665 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5666 won't.
5667
5668 @smallexample
5669 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5670 @end smallexample
5671
5672 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5673 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5674 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5675 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5676 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5677 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5678 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5679 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5680 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5681 search for each symbol reference.
5682
5683 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5684 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5685 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5686 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5687 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5688 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5689 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5690 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5691 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5692
5693 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5694 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5695 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5696 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5697 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5698 @smallexample
5699 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5700 @end smallexample
5701 @noindent
5702 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5703 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5704 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5705 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5706 takes precedence over a version script.
5707
5708 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5709 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5710 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5711 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5712 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5713
5714 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5715 source file. Here is an example:
5716
5717 @smallexample
5718 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5719 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5720 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5721 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5722 @end smallexample
5723
5724 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5725 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5726 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5727 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5728
5729 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5730 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5731 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5732 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5733 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5734 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5735
5736 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5737 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5738 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5739 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5740
5741 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5742
5743 @smallexample
5744 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5745 @end smallexample
5746
5747 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5748 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5749 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5750 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5751 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5752
5753 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5754 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5755 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5756 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5757 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5758 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5759 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5760 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5761 expect when you upgrade.
5762
5763 @node Expressions
5764 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5765 @cindex expressions
5766 @cindex arithmetic
5767 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5768 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5769 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5770 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5771
5772 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5773
5774 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5775 expressions.
5776
5777 @menu
5778 * Constants:: Constants
5779 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5780 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5781 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5782 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5783 * Operators:: Operators
5784 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5785 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5786 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5787 @end menu
5788
5789 @node Constants
5790 @subsection Constants
5791 @cindex integer notation
5792 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5793 All constants are integers.
5794
5795 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5796 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5797 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5798 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5799 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5800 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5801
5802 @cindex scaled integers
5803 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5804 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5805 @cindex suffixes for integers
5806 @cindex integer suffixes
5807 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5808 constant by
5809 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5810 @ifnottex
5811 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5812 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5813 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5814 @end ifnottex
5815 @tex
5816 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5817 @end tex
5818 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5819 respectively. For example, the following
5820 all refer to the same quantity:
5821
5822 @smallexample
5823 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5824 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5825 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5826 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5827 @end smallexample
5828
5829 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5830 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5831
5832 @node Symbolic Constants
5833 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5834 @cindex symbolic constants
5835 @kindex CONSTANT
5836 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5837 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5838
5839 @table @code
5840 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5841 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5842 The target's maximum page size.
5843
5844 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5845 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5846 The target's default page size.
5847 @end table
5848
5849 So for example:
5850
5851 @smallexample
5852 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5853 @end smallexample
5854
5855 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5856 supported by the target.
5857
5858 @node Symbols
5859 @subsection Symbol Names
5860 @cindex symbol names
5861 @cindex names
5862 @cindex quoted symbol names
5863 @kindex "
5864 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5865 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5866 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5867 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5868 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5869 @smallexample
5870 "SECTION" = 9;
5871 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5872 @end smallexample
5873
5874 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5875 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5876 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5877
5878 @node Orphan Sections
5879 @subsection Orphan Sections
5880 @cindex orphan
5881 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5882 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5883 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5884 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5885 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5886
5887 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5888 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5889 placed at the end of that output section.
5890
5891 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5892 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5893 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5894 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5895 one new output section.
5896
5897 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5898 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5899 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5900 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5901 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5902 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5903 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5904
5905 The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5906 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
5907 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5908
5909 @node Location Counter
5910 @subsection The Location Counter
5911 @kindex .
5912 @cindex dot
5913 @cindex location counter
5914 @cindex current output location
5915 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5916 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5917 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5918 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5919 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5920
5921 @cindex holes
5922 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5923 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5924 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5925 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5926 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5927
5928 @smallexample
5929 SECTIONS
5930 @{
5931 output :
5932 @{
5933 file1(.text)
5934 . = . + 1000;
5935 file2(.text)
5936 . += 1000;
5937 file3(.text)
5938 @} = 0x12345678;
5939 @}
5940 @end smallexample
5941 @noindent
5942 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5943 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5944 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5945 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5946 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5947 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5948
5949 @cindex dot inside sections
5950 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5951 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5952 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5953 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5954 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5955 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5956
5957 @smallexample
5958 SECTIONS
5959 @{
5960 . = 0x100
5961 .text: @{
5962 *(.text)
5963 . = 0x200
5964 @}
5965 . = 0x500
5966 .data: @{
5967 *(.data)
5968 . += 0x600
5969 @}
5970 @}
5971 @end smallexample
5972
5973 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5974 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5975 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5976 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5977 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5978 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5979 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5980 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5981
5982 @cindex dot outside sections
5983 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5984 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5985 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5986
5987 @smallexample
5988 SECTIONS
5989 @{
5990 start_of_text = . ;
5991 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5992 end_of_text = . ;
5993
5994 start_of_data = . ;
5995 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5996 end_of_data = . ;
5997 @}
5998 @end smallexample
5999
6000 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6001 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6002 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6003 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6004 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6005 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6006 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6007 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6008 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6009 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6010 as follows:
6011
6012 @smallexample
6013 SECTIONS
6014 @{
6015 start_of_text = . ;
6016 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6017 end_of_text = . ;
6018
6019 start_of_data = . ;
6020 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6021 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6022 end_of_data = . ;
6023 @}
6024 @end smallexample
6025
6026 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6027 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6028 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6029 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6030 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6031 section. So you could write:
6032
6033 @smallexample
6034 SECTIONS
6035 @{
6036 start_of_text = . ;
6037 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6038 end_of_text = . ;
6039
6040 . = . ;
6041 start_of_data = . ;
6042 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6043 end_of_data = . ;
6044 @}
6045 @end smallexample
6046
6047 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6048 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6049
6050 @need 2000
6051 @node Operators
6052 @subsection Operators
6053 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6054 @cindex arithmetic operators
6055 @cindex precedence in expressions
6056 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6057 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6058 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6059 @ifnottex
6060 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6061 @smallexample
6062 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6063 (highest)
6064 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6065 2 left * / %
6066 3 left + -
6067 4 left >> <<
6068 5 left == != > < <= >=
6069 6 left &
6070 7 left |
6071 8 left &&
6072 9 left ||
6073 10 right ? :
6074 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6075 (lowest)
6076 @end smallexample
6077 Notes:
6078 (1) Prefix operators
6079 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6080 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6081 @end ifnottex
6082 @tex
6083 \vskip \baselineskip
6084 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6085 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6086 \hrule
6087 \halign
6088 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6089 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6090 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6091 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6092 \noalign{\hrule}
6093 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6094 &highest&&&&&\cr
6095 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6096 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6097 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6098 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6099 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6100 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6101 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6102 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6103 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6104 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6105 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6106 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6107 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6108 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6109 \hrule}
6110 @end tex
6111 @iftex
6112 {
6113 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6114 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6115 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6116 }
6117 @end iftex
6118 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6119
6120 @node Evaluation
6121 @subsection Evaluation
6122 @cindex lazy evaluation
6123 @cindex expression evaluation order
6124 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6125 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6126
6127 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6128 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6129 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6130 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6131
6132 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6133 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6134 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6135 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6136
6137 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6138 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6139 allocation.
6140
6141 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6142 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6143
6144 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6145 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6146 following
6147 @smallexample
6148 @group
6149 SECTIONS
6150 @{
6151 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6152 @{ *(.text) @}
6153 @}
6154 @end group
6155 @end smallexample
6156 @noindent
6157 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6158 address}.
6159
6160 @node Expression Section
6161 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6162 @cindex expression sections
6163 @cindex absolute expressions
6164 @cindex relative expressions
6165 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6166 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6167 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6168 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6169 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6170 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6171 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6172 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6173 operations.
6174
6175 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6176 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6177 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6178 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6179 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6180 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6181 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6182 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6183 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6184 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6185 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6186 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6187 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6188 everywhere.
6189
6190 In the following simple example,
6191
6192 @smallexample
6193 @group
6194 SECTIONS
6195 @{
6196 . = 0x100;
6197 __executable_start = 0x100;
6198 .data :
6199 @{
6200 . = 0x10;
6201 __data_start = 0x10;
6202 *(.data)
6203 @}
6204 @dots{}
6205 @}
6206 @end group
6207 @end smallexample
6208
6209 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6210 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6211 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6212 section in the second two assignments.
6213
6214 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6215 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6216
6217 @itemize @bullet
6218 @item
6219 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6220 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6221 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6222 @item
6223 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6224 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6225 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6226 @item
6227 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6228 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6229 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6230 before applying the operator.
6231 @end itemize
6232
6233 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6234
6235 @itemize @bullet
6236 @item
6237 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6238 @item
6239 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6240 @item
6241 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6242 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6243 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6244 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6245 but an absolute address otherwise.
6246 @item
6247 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6248 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6249 section as the relative operand(s).
6250 @item
6251 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6252 conversions) is an absolute address.
6253 @end itemize
6254
6255 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6256 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6257 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6258 section @samp{.data}:
6259 @smallexample
6260 SECTIONS
6261 @{
6262 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6263 @}
6264 @end smallexample
6265 @noindent
6266 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6267 @samp{.data} section.
6268
6269 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6270 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6271
6272 @node Builtin Functions
6273 @subsection Builtin Functions
6274 @cindex functions in expressions
6275 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6276 use in linker script expressions.
6277
6278 @table @code
6279 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6280 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6281 @cindex expression, absolute
6282 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6283 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6284 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6285 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6286
6287 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6288 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6289 @cindex section address in expression
6290 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6291 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6292 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6293 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6294 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6295 the other two will be absolute:
6296 @smallexample
6297 @group
6298 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6299 .output1 :
6300 @{
6301 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6302 @dots{}
6303 @}
6304 .output :
6305 @{
6306 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6307 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6308 @}
6309 @dots{} @}
6310 @end group
6311 @end smallexample
6312
6313 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6314 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6315 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6316 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6317 @cindex round up location counter
6318 @cindex align location counter
6319 @cindex round up expression
6320 @cindex align expression
6321 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6322 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6323 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6324 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6325 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6326 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6327
6328 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6329 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6330 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6331 input sections:
6332 @smallexample
6333 @group
6334 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6335 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6336 *(.data)
6337 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6338 @}
6339 @dots{} @}
6340 @end group
6341 @end smallexample
6342 @noindent
6343 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6344 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6345 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6346 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6347
6348 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6349
6350 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6351 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6352 @cindex section alignment
6353 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6354 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6355 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6356 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6357 value in that section.
6358 @smallexample
6359 @group
6360 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6361 .output @{
6362 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6363 @dots{}
6364 @}
6365 @dots{} @}
6366 @end group
6367 @end smallexample
6368
6369 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6370 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6371 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6372 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6373 section.
6374
6375 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6376 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6377 This is equivalent to either
6378 @smallexample
6379 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6380 @end smallexample
6381 or
6382 @smallexample
6383 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6384 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6385 @end smallexample
6386 @noindent
6387 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6388 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6389 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6390 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6391 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6392 bytes in the on-disk file.
6393
6394 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6395 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6396 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6397 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6398 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6399 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6400 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6401
6402 @noindent
6403 Example:
6404 @smallexample
6405 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6406 @end smallexample
6407
6408 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6409 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6410 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6411 evaluation purposes.
6412
6413 @smallexample
6414 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6415 @end smallexample
6416
6417 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6418 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6419 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6420 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6421 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6422 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6423 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6424 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6425 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6426 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6427 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6428 section alignment.
6429
6430 @smallexample
6431 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6432 @end smallexample
6433
6434 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6435 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6436 @cindex symbol defaults
6437 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6438 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6439 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6440 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6441 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6442 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6443 existed, its value is preserved:
6444
6445 @smallexample
6446 @group
6447 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6448 .text : @{
6449 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6450 @dots{}
6451 @}
6452 @dots{}
6453 @}
6454 @end group
6455 @end smallexample
6456
6457 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6458 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6459 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6460
6461 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6462 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6463 @cindex section load address in expression
6464 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6465 Section LMA}).
6466
6467 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6468 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6469 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6470 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6471
6472 @kindex MAX
6473 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6474 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6475
6476 @kindex MIN
6477 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6478 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6479
6480 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6481 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6482 @cindex unallocated address, next
6483 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6484 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6485 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6486 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6487
6488 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6489 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6490 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6491
6492 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6493 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6494 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6495 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6496 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6497 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6498 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6499 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6500 name.
6501
6502 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6503 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6504 @cindex section size
6505 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6506 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6507 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6508 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6509 @smallexample
6510 @group
6511 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6512 .output @{
6513 .start = . ;
6514 @dots{}
6515 .end = . ;
6516 @}
6517 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6518 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6519 @dots{} @}
6520 @end group
6521 @end smallexample
6522
6523 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6524 @itemx sizeof_headers
6525 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6526 @cindex header size
6527 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6528 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6529 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6530 choose, to facilitate paging.
6531
6532 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6533 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6534 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6535 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6536 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6537 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6538 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6539 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6540 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6541 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6542 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6543 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6544 @end table
6545
6546 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6547 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6548 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6549 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6550 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6551 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6552 linker will report an error.
6553
6554 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6555
6556 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6557 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6558 commands.
6559
6560 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6561 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6562 read. This can affect archive searching.
6563
6564 @ifset GENERIC
6565 @node Machine Dependent
6566 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6567
6568 @cindex machine dependencies
6569 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6570 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6571 functionality are not listed.
6572
6573 @menu
6574 @ifset H8300
6575 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6576 @end ifset
6577 @ifset M68HC11
6578 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6579 @end ifset
6580 @ifset ARM
6581 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6582 @end ifset
6583 @ifset HPPA
6584 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6585 @end ifset
6586 @ifset M68K
6587 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6588 @end ifset
6589 @ifset MIPS
6590 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6591 @end ifset
6592 @ifset MMIX
6593 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6594 @end ifset
6595 @ifset MSP430
6596 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6597 @end ifset
6598 @ifset NDS32
6599 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6600 @end ifset
6601 @ifset NIOSII
6602 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6603 @end ifset
6604 @ifset POWERPC
6605 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6606 @end ifset
6607 @ifset POWERPC64
6608 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6609 @end ifset
6610 @ifset S/390
6611 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6612 @end ifset
6613 @ifset SPU
6614 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6615 @end ifset
6616 @ifset TICOFF
6617 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6618 @end ifset
6619 @ifset WIN32
6620 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6621 @end ifset
6622 @ifset XTENSA
6623 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6624 @end ifset
6625 @end menu
6626 @end ifset
6627
6628 @ifset H8300
6629 @ifclear GENERIC
6630 @raisesections
6631 @end ifclear
6632
6633 @node H8/300
6634 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6635
6636 @cindex H8/300 support
6637 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6638 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6639
6640 @table @emph
6641 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6642 @item relaxing address modes
6643 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6644 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6645 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6646 respectively.
6647
6648 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6649 @item synthesizing instructions
6650 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6651 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6652 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6653 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6654 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6655 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6656 top page of memory).
6657
6658 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6659 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6660 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6661 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6662 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6663 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6664 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6665
6666 @item bit manipulation instructions
6667 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6668 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6669 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6670 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6671 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6672 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6673 the top page of memory).
6674
6675 @item system control instructions
6676 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6677 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6678 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6679 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6680 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6681 the top page of memory).
6682 @end table
6683
6684 @ifclear GENERIC
6685 @lowersections
6686 @end ifclear
6687 @end ifset
6688
6689 @ifclear GENERIC
6690 @ifset Renesas
6691 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6692 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6693 @node Renesas
6694 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6695
6696 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6697 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6698 options are required for these chips.
6699 @end ifset
6700 @end ifclear
6701
6702 @ifset ARM
6703 @ifclear GENERIC
6704 @raisesections
6705 @end ifclear
6706
6707 @ifset M68HC11
6708 @ifclear GENERIC
6709 @raisesections
6710 @end ifclear
6711
6712 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6713 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6714
6715 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6716
6717 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6718
6719 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6720 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6721
6722 @table @emph
6723 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6724 @item relaxing address modes
6725 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6726 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6727 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6728 respectively.
6729
6730 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6731 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6732 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6733
6734 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6735 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6736 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6737 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6738 @code{bset} instructions.
6739
6740 @end table
6741
6742 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6743
6744 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6745 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6746 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6747 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6748 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6749 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6750 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6751 point to the function trampoline.
6752
6753 @ifclear GENERIC
6754 @lowersections
6755 @end ifclear
6756 @end ifset
6757
6758 @node ARM
6759 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6760
6761 @cindex ARM interworking support
6762 @kindex --support-old-code
6763 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6764 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6765 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6766 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6767 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6768 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
6769 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6770 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6771 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6772 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6773
6774 @cindex thumb entry point
6775 @cindex entry point, thumb
6776 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6777 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6778 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6779 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6780 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6781 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6782
6783 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6784 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6785 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6786 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6787 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6788 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6789
6790 @cindex BE8
6791 @kindex --be8
6792 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6793 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6794 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6795 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6796 little-endian code.
6797
6798 @cindex TARGET1
6799 @kindex --target1-rel
6800 @kindex --target1-abs
6801 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6802 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6803 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6804 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6805
6806 @cindex TARGET2
6807 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6808 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6809 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6810 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6811 @table @samp
6812 @item rel
6813 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6814 @item abs
6815 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6816 @item got-rel
6817 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6818 @end table
6819
6820 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6821 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6822 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6823 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6824 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6825 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6826
6827 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6828 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6829 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6830
6831 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6832 relocations are ignored.
6833
6834 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6835 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6836 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6837 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6838
6839 @smallexample
6840 TST rM, #1
6841 MOVEQ PC, rM
6842 BX Rn
6843 @end smallexample
6844
6845 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6846 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6847 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6848
6849 @cindex USE_BLX
6850 @kindex --use-blx
6851 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6852 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6853 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6854 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6855 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6856
6857 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6858 specify it if you are using that target.
6859
6860 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6861 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6862 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6863 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6864 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6865 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6866 the support code can read the intended values.
6867
6868 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6869 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6870 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6871 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6872 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6873 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6874
6875 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6876 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6877 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6878 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6879 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6880 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6881
6882 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6883 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6884 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6885 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6886 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6887 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6888 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6889
6890 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6891 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6892 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6893 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6894 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6895 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6896 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6897
6898 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6899 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6900 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6901
6902 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6903 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6904
6905 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6906 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6907 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6908 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6909 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6910 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6911 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6912 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6913
6914 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6915 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6916
6917 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6918 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6919 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6920 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6921 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6922
6923 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6924 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6925 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6926 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6927 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6928 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6929
6930 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6931 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6932
6933 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6934 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6935 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6936 occurs.
6937
6938 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6939 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6940 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6941 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6942 occurs.
6943
6944 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6945 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6946 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6947 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6948 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6949 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6950 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6951 not be diagnosed.
6952
6953 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6954 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6955 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6956 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6957 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6958 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6959 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6960
6961 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6962 @kindex --pic-veneer
6963 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6964 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6965 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6966 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6967
6968 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6969 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6970 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6971 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6972 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6973 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6974 controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6975 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6976 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6977 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6978 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6979 where they should be placed.
6980
6981 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6982 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6983 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6984 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6985 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6986 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6987 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6988 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6989 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6990 from the input sections.
6991
6992 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6993 @samp{N = +1}.
6994
6995 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6996 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6997 otherwise.
6998
6999 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7000 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7001 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7002 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7003
7004 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7005
7006 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7007 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7008 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7009 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7010
7011 Please contact ARM for further details.
7012
7013 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7014 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7015 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7016 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7017
7018 @kindex --long-plt
7019 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7020 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7021 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7022 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7023
7024 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7025 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7026 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7027 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7028
7029 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7030 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7031 Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
7032 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7033 veneers in memory.
7034
7035 @kindex --cmse-implib
7036 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7037 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7038 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7039 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7040 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7041
7042 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7043 @cindex Input import library
7044 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7045 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7046 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7047 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7048 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7049 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7050 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7051 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7052 specified.
7053
7054 @ifclear GENERIC
7055 @lowersections
7056 @end ifclear
7057 @end ifset
7058
7059 @ifset HPPA
7060 @ifclear GENERIC
7061 @raisesections
7062 @end ifclear
7063
7064 @node HPPA ELF32
7065 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7066 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7067 @kindex --multi-subspace
7068 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7069 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7070 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7071 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7072 multiple sub-spaces.
7073
7074 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7075 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7076 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7077 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7078 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7079 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7080 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7081 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7082 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7083 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7084 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7085 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7086 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7087 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7088 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7089 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7090
7091 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7092 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7093 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7094 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7095
7096 @ifclear GENERIC
7097 @lowersections
7098 @end ifclear
7099 @end ifset
7100
7101 @ifset M68K
7102 @ifclear GENERIC
7103 @raisesections
7104 @end ifclear
7105
7106 @node M68K
7107 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7108
7109 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7110 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7111 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7112 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7113 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7114 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7115 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7116 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7117 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7118 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7119 support such GOTs.
7120 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7121 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7122 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7123 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7124
7125 @ifclear GENERIC
7126 @lowersections
7127 @end ifclear
7128 @end ifset
7129
7130 @ifset MIPS
7131 @ifclear GENERIC
7132 @raisesections
7133 @end ifclear
7134
7135 @node MIPS
7136 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7137
7138 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7139 @kindex --insn32
7140 @kindex --no-insn32
7141 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7142 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7143 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7144 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7145 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7146 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7147
7148 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7149 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7150 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7151 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7152 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7153 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7154 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7155 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7156 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7157 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7158 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7159 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7160
7161 @ifclear GENERIC
7162 @lowersections
7163 @end ifclear
7164 @end ifset
7165
7166 @ifset MMIX
7167 @ifclear GENERIC
7168 @raisesections
7169 @end ifclear
7170
7171 @node MMIX
7172 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7173 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7174 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7175 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7176 can translate between the two formats.
7177
7178 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7179 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7180 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7181 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7182 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7183 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7184 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7185 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7186
7187 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7188 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7189 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7190 of a section.
7191
7192 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7193 are left out from an mmo file.
7194
7195 @ifclear GENERIC
7196 @lowersections
7197 @end ifclear
7198 @end ifset
7199
7200 @ifset MSP430
7201 @ifclear GENERIC
7202 @raisesections
7203 @end ifclear
7204
7205 @node MSP430
7206 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7207 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7208 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7209 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7210
7211 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7212 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7213
7214 @table @code
7215 @item @samp{.vectors}
7216 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7217
7218 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7219 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7220 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7221
7222 @item @samp{.infomem}
7223 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7224 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7225
7226 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7227 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7228 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7229
7230 @item @samp{.noinit}
7231 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7232
7233 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7234 @end table
7235
7236 @table @option
7237 @cindex MSP430 Options
7238 @kindex --code-region
7239 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7240 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7241 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7242 using this option.
7243
7244 @kindex --data-region
7245 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7246 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7247 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7248 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7249
7250 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7251 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7252 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7253 and @code{--data-region} options.
7254 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7255 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7256 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7257 @end table
7258
7259 @ifclear GENERIC
7260 @lowersections
7261 @end ifclear
7262 @end ifset
7263
7264 @ifset NDS32
7265 @ifclear GENERIC
7266 @raisesections
7267 @end ifclear
7268
7269 @node NDS32
7270 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7271 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7272 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7273 relaxes objects according to these options.
7274
7275 @table @code
7276 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7277 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7278
7279 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7280 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7281
7282 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7283 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7284
7285 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7286 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7287
7288 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7289 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7290
7291 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7292 Update the existing EX9 table.
7293
7294 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7295 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7296
7297 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7298 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7299
7300 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7301 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7302
7303 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7304 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7305 @end table
7306
7307 @ifclear GENERIC
7308 @lowersections
7309 @end ifclear
7310 @end ifset
7311
7312 @ifset NIOSII
7313 @ifclear GENERIC
7314 @raisesections
7315 @end ifclear
7316
7317 @node Nios II
7318 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7319 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7320 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7321
7322 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7323 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7324 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7325 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7326 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7327 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7328 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7329 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7330 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7331 larger than 256MB.
7332
7333 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7334 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7335 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7336 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7337 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7338 register as a temporary.
7339
7340 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7341 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7342 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7343
7344 @ifclear GENERIC
7345 @lowersections
7346 @end ifclear
7347 @end ifset
7348
7349 @ifset POWERPC
7350 @ifclear GENERIC
7351 @raisesections
7352 @end ifclear
7353
7354 @node PowerPC ELF32
7355 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7356 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7357 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7358 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7359 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7360 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7361 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7362 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7363 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7364 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7365 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7366 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7367 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7368
7369 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7370 @table @option
7371 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7372 @kindex --bss-plt
7373 @item --bss-plt
7374 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7375 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7376 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7377 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7378 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7379 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7380 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7381 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7382
7383 @kindex --secure-plt
7384 @item --secure-plt
7385 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7386 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7387 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7388 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7389 style BSS PLT.
7390
7391 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7392 @kindex --sdata-got
7393 @item --sdata-got
7394 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7395 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7396 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7397 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7398 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7399 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7400 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7401 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7402 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7403 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7404 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7405 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7406
7407 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7408 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7409 @item --emit-stub-syms
7410 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7411 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7412
7413 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7414 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7415 @item --no-tls-optimize
7416 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7417 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7418 disable the optimization.
7419 @end table
7420
7421 @ifclear GENERIC
7422 @lowersections
7423 @end ifclear
7424 @end ifset
7425
7426 @ifset POWERPC64
7427 @ifclear GENERIC
7428 @raisesections
7429 @end ifclear
7430
7431 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7432 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7433
7434 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7435 @table @option
7436 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7437 @kindex --stub-group-size
7438 @item --stub-group-size
7439 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7440 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7441 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7442 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7443 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7444 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7445 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7446 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7447 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7448 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7449 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7450 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7451 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7452 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7453
7454 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7455 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7456 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7457 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7458
7459 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7460 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7461 @item --emit-stub-syms
7462 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7463 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7464
7465 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7466 @kindex --dotsyms
7467 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7468 @item --dotsyms
7469 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7470 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7471 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7472 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7473 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7474 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7475 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7476 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7477 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7478 feature.
7479
7480 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7481 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7482 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7483 @item --save-restore-funcs
7484 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7485 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7486 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7487 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7488 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7489 link.
7490
7491 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7492 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7493 @item --no-tls-optimize
7494 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7495 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7496 disable the optimization.
7497
7498 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7499 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7500 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7501 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7502 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7503 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7504 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7505 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7506 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7507 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7508 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7509 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7510 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7511 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7512 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7513
7514 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7515 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7516 @item --no-opd-optimize
7517 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7518 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7519 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7520 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7521
7522 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7523 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7524 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7525 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7526 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7527 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7528 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7529
7530 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7531 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7532 @item --no-toc-optimize
7533 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7534 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7535 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7536 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7537 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7538 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7539 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7540 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7541 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7542 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7543 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7544 optimization.
7545
7546 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7547 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7548 @item --no-multi-toc
7549 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7550 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7551 where TOC
7552 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7553 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7554 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7555 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7556 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7557 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7558 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7559 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7560
7561 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7562 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7563 @item --no-toc-sort
7564 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7565 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7566 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7567 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7568 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7569 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7570 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7571 off this feature.
7572
7573 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7574 @kindex --plt-align
7575 @kindex --no-plt-align
7576 @item --plt-align
7577 @itemx --no-plt-align
7578 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7579 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7580 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7581 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7582 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7583 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7584 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7585
7586 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7587 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7588 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7589 @item --plt-static-chain
7590 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7591 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7592 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7593 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7594
7595 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7596 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7597 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7598 @item --plt-thread-safe
7599 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7600 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7601 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7602 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7603 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7604 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7605 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7606 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7607 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7608 default behaviour.
7609
7610 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7611 @kindex --plt-localentry
7612 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7613 @item --plt-localentry
7614 @itemx --no-localentry
7615 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7616 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7617 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7618 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7619 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7620 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7621 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7622 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7623 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7624 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7625 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7626 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7627 @end table
7628
7629 @ifclear GENERIC
7630 @lowersections
7631 @end ifclear
7632 @end ifset
7633
7634 @ifset S/390
7635 @ifclear GENERIC
7636 @raisesections
7637 @end ifclear
7638
7639 @node S/390 ELF
7640 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7641
7642 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7643 @table @option
7644
7645 @cindex S/390
7646 @kindex --s390-pgste
7647 @item --s390-pgste
7648 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7649 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7650 binaries marked that way.
7651 @end table
7652
7653 @ifclear GENERIC
7654 @lowersections
7655 @end ifclear
7656 @end ifset
7657
7658 @ifset SPU
7659 @ifclear GENERIC
7660 @raisesections
7661 @end ifclear
7662
7663 @node SPU ELF
7664 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7665
7666 @cindex SPU ELF options
7667 @table @option
7668
7669 @cindex SPU plugins
7670 @kindex --plugin
7671 @item --plugin
7672 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7673
7674 @cindex SPU overlays
7675 @kindex --no-overlays
7676 @item --no-overlays
7677 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7678 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7679 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7680 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7681
7682 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7683 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7684 @item --emit-stub-syms
7685 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7686 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7687
7688 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7689 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7690 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7691 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7692 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7693 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7694
7695 @cindex SPU local store size
7696 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7697 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7698 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7699 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7700 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7701
7702 @cindex SPU
7703 @kindex --stack-analysis
7704 @item --stack-analysis
7705 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7706 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7707 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7708 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7709 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7710 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7711 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7712 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7713 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7714 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7715 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7716 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7717 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7718 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7719 and calls will be given.
7720
7721 @cindex SPU
7722 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7723 @item --emit-stack-syms
7724 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7725 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7726 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7727 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7728 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7729 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7730 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7731 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7732 @end table
7733
7734 @ifclear GENERIC
7735 @lowersections
7736 @end ifclear
7737 @end ifset
7738
7739 @ifset TICOFF
7740 @ifclear GENERIC
7741 @raisesections
7742 @end ifclear
7743
7744 @node TI COFF
7745 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7746 @cindex TI COFF versions
7747 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7748 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7749 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7750 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7751 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7752 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7753
7754 @ifclear GENERIC
7755 @lowersections
7756 @end ifclear
7757 @end ifset
7758
7759 @ifset WIN32
7760 @ifclear GENERIC
7761 @raisesections
7762 @end ifclear
7763
7764 @node WIN32
7765 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7766
7767 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7768 See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7769 command-line options mentioned here.
7770
7771 @table @emph
7772 @cindex import libraries
7773 @item import libraries
7774 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7775 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7776 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7777 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7778 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7779 @samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
7780
7781 @item exporting DLL symbols
7782 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7783 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7784
7785 @table @emph
7786 @item using auto-export functionality
7787 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7788 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7789 which is controlled by the following command-line options:
7790
7791 @itemize
7792 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7793 @item --exclude-symbols
7794 @item --exclude-libs
7795 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7796 @item --version-script
7797 @end itemize
7798
7799 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7800 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7801 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7802 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7803 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7804 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7805 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7806 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7807
7808 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7809 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7810 if either of the following are true:
7811
7812 @itemize
7813 @item A DEF file is used.
7814 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7815 @end itemize
7816
7817 @item using a DEF file
7818 @cindex using a DEF file
7819 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7820 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7821 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7822 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7823 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7824
7825 @example
7826 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7827 @end example
7828
7829 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7830 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7831
7832 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7833
7834 @example
7835 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7836
7837 EXPORTS
7838 foo
7839 bar
7840 _bar = bar
7841 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7842 var1 DATA
7843 doo = foo == foo2
7844 eoo DATA == var1
7845 @end example
7846
7847 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7848 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7849 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7850 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7851 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7852 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7853 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7854 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7855 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7856
7857 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7858 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7859 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7860
7861 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7862 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7863 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7864 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7865
7866 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7867 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7868 non-default base address for the image.
7869
7870 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7871 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7872 filename specified on the command line.
7873
7874 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7875
7876 @example
7877 EXPORTS
7878 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7879 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7880 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7881 @end example
7882
7883 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7884 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7885 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7886 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7887 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7888 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7889 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7890
7891 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7892
7893 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7894 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7895 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7896 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7897 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7898
7899 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7900 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7901 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7902 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7903
7904 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7905 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7906 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7907 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7908 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7909 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7910 application will behave unexpectedly.
7911
7912 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7913 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7914 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7915 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7916 the DLL without an import library.
7917
7918 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7919 other DEF file statements
7920
7921 @cindex creating a DEF file
7922 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7923 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
7924
7925 @item Using decorations
7926 @cindex Using decorations
7927 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7928 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7929 declared as:
7930
7931 @example
7932 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7933 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7934 @end example
7935
7936 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7937 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7938 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7939 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7940
7941 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7942 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7943 instead:
7944
7945 @example
7946 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7947 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7948 @end example
7949
7950 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7951 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7952 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7953 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7954 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7955 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7956 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7957 information.
7958 @end table
7959
7960 @cindex automatic data imports
7961 @item automatic data imports
7962 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7963 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7964 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7965 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7966 code to these platforms, especially for large
7967 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7968 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7969 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7970 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7971 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7972 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7973 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7974 trigger the feature's use.
7975
7976 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7977 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7978
7979 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7980 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7981
7982 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7983 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7984 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7985 below.
7986
7987 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7988 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7989 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7990 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7991 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7992 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7993 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7994 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7995 references.
7996
7997 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7998 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7999 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8000 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8001 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8002 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8003 run without error on an older system.
8004
8005 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8006 enabled as needed.
8007
8008 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8009 @item direct linking to a dll
8010 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8011 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8012 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8013 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8014 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8015 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8016 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8017 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8018 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8019 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8020
8021 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8022 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8023 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8024 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8025 select the dll instead of an import library.
8026
8027
8028 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8029 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8030
8031 @example
8032 libxxx.dll.a
8033 xxx.dll.a
8034 libxxx.a
8035 xxx.lib
8036 libxxx.lib
8037 cygxxx.dll (*)
8038 libxxx.dll
8039 xxx.dll
8040 @end example
8041
8042 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8043
8044 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8045 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8046 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8047 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8048 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8049
8050 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8051 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8052 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8053 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8054 could coexist on the same machine.
8055
8056 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8057 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8058 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8059
8060 @example
8061 bin/
8062 cygxxx.dll
8063 lib/
8064 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8065 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8066 @end example
8067
8068 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8069 done two ways:
8070
8071 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8072 @example
8073 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8074 @end example
8075
8076 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8077 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8078 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8079 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8080
8081 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8082 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8083 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8084 making the app/dll.
8085
8086 @example
8087 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8088 @end example
8089
8090 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8091
8092 @example
8093 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8094 @end example
8095
8096 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8097 perfectly legal
8098
8099 @example
8100 bin/
8101 cygxxx-5.dll
8102 lib/
8103 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8104 @end example
8105
8106 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8107 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8108 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8109
8110 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8111 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8112
8113 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8114 work with auto-imported data.
8115
8116 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8117 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8118 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8119 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8120 possible to do this without an import lib.
8121
8122 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8123 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8124 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8125 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8126
8127 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8128 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8129 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8130 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8131 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8132 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8133 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8134
8135 @item symbol aliasing
8136 @table @emph
8137 @item adding additional names
8138 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8139 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8140 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8141 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8142 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8143
8144 @example
8145 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8146
8147 EXPORTS
8148 foo
8149 _foo = foo
8150 @end example
8151
8152 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8153
8154 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8155 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8156
8157 @example
8158 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8159 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8160 @end example
8161
8162 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8163 symbols.
8164
8165 @item renaming symbols
8166 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8167 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8168 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8169 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8170 created). In the following example:
8171
8172 @example
8173 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8174
8175 EXPORTS
8176 _foo = foo
8177 @end example
8178
8179 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8180 @samp{_foo}.
8181 @end table
8182
8183 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8184 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
8185 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8186 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8187 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8188 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8189 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8190 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8191 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8192 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8193 which is probably not what you wanted.
8194
8195 @cindex weak externals
8196 @item weak externals
8197 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8198 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8199 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8200 are three variants of weak externals:
8201 @itemize
8202 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8203 called lazy externals.
8204 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8205 This form is not presently implemented.
8206 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8207 implemented.
8208 @end itemize
8209 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8210 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8211 uses a default value.
8212
8213 @cindex aligned common symbols
8214 @item aligned common symbols
8215 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8216 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8217 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8218 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8219 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8220 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8221 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8222 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8223
8224 @end table
8225
8226 @ifclear GENERIC
8227 @lowersections
8228 @end ifclear
8229 @end ifset
8230
8231 @ifset XTENSA
8232 @ifclear GENERIC
8233 @raisesections
8234 @end ifclear
8235
8236 @node Xtensa
8237 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8238
8239 @cindex Xtensa processors
8240 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8241 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8242 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8243 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8244 example, with the command:
8245
8246 @smallexample
8247 SECTIONS
8248 @{
8249 .text : @{
8250 *(.literal .text)
8251 @}
8252 @}
8253 @end smallexample
8254
8255 @noindent
8256 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8257 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8258 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8259 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8260 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8261 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8262 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8263
8264 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8265 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8266 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8267 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8268 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8269 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8270 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8271 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8272 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8273 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8274 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8275 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8276
8277 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8278 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8279 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8280 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8281 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8282 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8283 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8284 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8285 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8286 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8287 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8288 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8289 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8290 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8291
8292 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8293 control the linker:
8294
8295 @cindex Xtensa options
8296 @table @option
8297 @item --size-opt
8298 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8299 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8300 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8301 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8302 preserve the correctness of the code.
8303 @end table
8304
8305 @ifclear GENERIC
8306 @lowersections
8307 @end ifclear
8308 @end ifset
8309
8310 @ifclear SingleFormat
8311 @node BFD
8312 @chapter BFD
8313
8314 @cindex back end
8315 @cindex object file management
8316 @cindex object formats available
8317 @kindex objdump -i
8318 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8319 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8320 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8321 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8322 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8323 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8324 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8325 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8326 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8327
8328 @cindex BFD requirements
8329 @cindex requirements for BFD
8330 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8331 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8332 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8333 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8334 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8335 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8336 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8337
8338 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8339 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8340 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8341 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8342
8343 @menu
8344 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8345 @end menu
8346
8347 @node BFD outline
8348 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8349 @cindex opening object files
8350 @include bfdsumm.texi
8351 @end ifclear
8352
8353 @node Reporting Bugs
8354 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8355 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8356 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8357
8358 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8359
8360 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8361 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8362 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8363 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8364 @command{ld}.
8365
8366 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8367 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8368
8369 @menu
8370 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8371 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8372 @end menu
8373
8374 @node Bug Criteria
8375 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8376 @cindex bug criteria
8377
8378 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8379
8380 @itemize @bullet
8381 @cindex fatal signal
8382 @cindex linker crash
8383 @cindex crash of linker
8384 @item
8385 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8386 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8387
8388 @cindex error on valid input
8389 @item
8390 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8391
8392 @cindex invalid input
8393 @item
8394 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8395 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8396 object files are correct.
8397
8398 @item
8399 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8400 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8401 @end itemize
8402
8403 @node Bug Reporting
8404 @section How to Report Bugs
8405 @cindex bug reports
8406 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8407
8408 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8409 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8410 recommend you contact that organization first.
8411
8412 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8413 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8414 distribution.
8415
8416 @ifset BUGURL
8417 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8418 @value{BUGURL}.
8419 @end ifset
8420
8421 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8422 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8423 fact or leave it out, state it!
8424
8425 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8426 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8427 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8428 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8429 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8430 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8431 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8432 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8433 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8434 and the most helpful.
8435
8436 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8437 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8438 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8439
8440 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8441 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8442 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8443 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8444
8445 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8446
8447 @itemize @bullet
8448 @item
8449 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8450 the @samp{--version} argument.
8451
8452 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8453 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8454
8455 @item
8456 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8457 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8458
8459 @item
8460 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8461 version number.
8462
8463 @item
8464 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8465 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8466
8467 @item
8468 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8469 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8470 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8471 sufficient.
8472
8473 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8474 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8475
8476 @item
8477 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8478 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8479 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8480 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8481 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8482 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8483 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8484 attachments are best.
8485
8486 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8487 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8488 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8489 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8490 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8491
8492 @item
8493 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8494 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8495
8496 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8497 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8498 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8499 a chance to make a mistake.
8500
8501 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8502 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8503 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8504 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8505 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8506 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8507 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8508 any conclusion from our observations.
8509
8510 @item
8511 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8512 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8513 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8514 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8515 context, not by line number.
8516
8517 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8518 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8519 @end itemize
8520
8521 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8522
8523 @itemize @bullet
8524 @item
8525 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8526
8527 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8528 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8529 changes will not affect it.
8530
8531 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8532 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8533 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8534 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8535
8536 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8537 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8538 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8539 less time, and so on.
8540
8541 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8542 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8543
8544 @item
8545 A patch for the bug.
8546
8547 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8548 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8549 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8550 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8551
8552 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8553 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8554 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8555 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8556 fixed.
8557
8558 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8559 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8560 help us to understand.
8561
8562 @item
8563 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8564
8565 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8566 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8567 @end itemize
8568
8569 @node MRI
8570 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8571 @cindex MRI compatibility
8572 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8573 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8574 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8575 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8576 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8577 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8578 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8579
8580 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8581 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8582 features to make use of them.
8583
8584 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8585 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8586
8587 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8588 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8589 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8590 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8591 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8592
8593 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8594
8595 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8596 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8597 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8598
8599 @table @code
8600 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8601 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8602 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8603 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8604 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8605 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8606 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8607 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8608 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8609 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8610 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8611
8612 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8613 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8614 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8615 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8616
8617 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8618
8619 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8620 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8621 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8622 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8623
8624 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8625 @item BASE @var{expression}
8626 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8627 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8628
8629 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8630 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8631 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8632 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8633
8634 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8635 @item END
8636 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8637
8638 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8639 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8640 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8641 language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8642
8643 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8644 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8645 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8646 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8647
8648 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8649 same line, with no change in its effect.
8650
8651 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8652 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8653 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8654 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8655 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8656 command line.
8657
8658 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8659 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8660 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8661 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8662 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8663
8664 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8665 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8666 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8667 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8668 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8669 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8670 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8671 file, in the order specified.
8672
8673 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8674 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8675 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8676 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8677 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8678 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8679
8680 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8681 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8682 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8683 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8684 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8685 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8686 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8687 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8688 @end table
8689
8690 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8691 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8692 @include fdl.texi
8693
8694 @node LD Index
8695 @unnumbered LD Index
8696
8697 @printindex cp
8698
8699 @tex
8700 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8701 % meantime:
8702 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8703 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8704 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8705 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8706 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8707 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8708 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8709 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8710 \page\colophon
8711 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8712 @end tex
8713
8714 @bye